1 //===- CodeGenPrepare.cpp - Prepare a function for code generation --------===// 2 // 3 // Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions. 4 // See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information. 5 // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception 6 // 7 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 8 // 9 // This pass munges the code in the input function to better prepare it for 10 // SelectionDAG-based code generation. This works around limitations in it's 11 // basic-block-at-a-time approach. It should eventually be removed. 12 // 13 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 14 15 #include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h" 16 #include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h" 17 #include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h" 18 #include "llvm/ADT/PointerIntPair.h" 19 #include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h" 20 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h" 21 #include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h" 22 #include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h" 23 #include "llvm/Analysis/BlockFrequencyInfo.h" 24 #include "llvm/Analysis/BranchProbabilityInfo.h" 25 #include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h" 26 #include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h" 27 #include "llvm/Analysis/LoopInfo.h" 28 #include "llvm/Analysis/MemoryBuiltins.h" 29 #include "llvm/Analysis/ProfileSummaryInfo.h" 30 #include "llvm/Analysis/TargetLibraryInfo.h" 31 #include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h" 32 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h" 33 #include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h" 34 #include "llvm/CodeGen/Analysis.h" 35 #include "llvm/CodeGen/ISDOpcodes.h" 36 #include "llvm/CodeGen/SelectionDAGNodes.h" 37 #include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetLowering.h" 38 #include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetPassConfig.h" 39 #include "llvm/CodeGen/TargetSubtargetInfo.h" 40 #include "llvm/CodeGen/ValueTypes.h" 41 #include "llvm/Config/llvm-config.h" 42 #include "llvm/IR/Argument.h" 43 #include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h" 44 #include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h" 45 #include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h" 46 #include "llvm/IR/Constant.h" 47 #include "llvm/IR/Constants.h" 48 #include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h" 49 #include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h" 50 #include "llvm/IR/Dominators.h" 51 #include "llvm/IR/Function.h" 52 #include "llvm/IR/GetElementPtrTypeIterator.h" 53 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h" 54 #include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h" 55 #include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h" 56 #include "llvm/IR/InlineAsm.h" 57 #include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h" 58 #include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h" 59 #include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h" 60 #include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h" 61 #include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h" 62 #include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h" 63 #include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h" 64 #include "llvm/IR/Module.h" 65 #include "llvm/IR/Operator.h" 66 #include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h" 67 #include "llvm/IR/Statepoint.h" 68 #include "llvm/IR/Type.h" 69 #include "llvm/IR/Use.h" 70 #include "llvm/IR/User.h" 71 #include "llvm/IR/Value.h" 72 #include "llvm/IR/ValueHandle.h" 73 #include "llvm/IR/ValueMap.h" 74 #include "llvm/Pass.h" 75 #include "llvm/Support/BlockFrequency.h" 76 #include "llvm/Support/BranchProbability.h" 77 #include "llvm/Support/Casting.h" 78 #include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h" 79 #include "llvm/Support/Compiler.h" 80 #include "llvm/Support/Debug.h" 81 #include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h" 82 #include "llvm/Support/MachineValueType.h" 83 #include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h" 84 #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h" 85 #include "llvm/Target/TargetMachine.h" 86 #include "llvm/Target/TargetOptions.h" 87 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h" 88 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BypassSlowDivision.h" 89 #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/SimplifyLibCalls.h" 90 #include <algorithm> 91 #include <cassert> 92 #include <cstdint> 93 #include <iterator> 94 #include <limits> 95 #include <memory> 96 #include <utility> 97 #include <vector> 98 99 using namespace llvm; 100 using namespace llvm::PatternMatch; 101 102 #define DEBUG_TYPE "codegenprepare" 103 104 STATISTIC(NumBlocksElim, "Number of blocks eliminated"); 105 STATISTIC(NumPHIsElim, "Number of trivial PHIs eliminated"); 106 STATISTIC(NumGEPsElim, "Number of GEPs converted to casts"); 107 STATISTIC(NumCmpUses, "Number of uses of Cmp expressions replaced with uses of " 108 "sunken Cmps"); 109 STATISTIC(NumCastUses, "Number of uses of Cast expressions replaced with uses " 110 "of sunken Casts"); 111 STATISTIC(NumMemoryInsts, "Number of memory instructions whose address " 112 "computations were sunk"); 113 STATISTIC(NumMemoryInstsPhiCreated, 114 "Number of phis created when address " 115 "computations were sunk to memory instructions"); 116 STATISTIC(NumMemoryInstsSelectCreated, 117 "Number of select created when address " 118 "computations were sunk to memory instructions"); 119 STATISTIC(NumExtsMoved, "Number of [s|z]ext instructions combined with loads"); 120 STATISTIC(NumExtUses, "Number of uses of [s|z]ext instructions optimized"); 121 STATISTIC(NumAndsAdded, 122 "Number of and mask instructions added to form ext loads"); 123 STATISTIC(NumAndUses, "Number of uses of and mask instructions optimized"); 124 STATISTIC(NumRetsDup, "Number of return instructions duplicated"); 125 STATISTIC(NumDbgValueMoved, "Number of debug value instructions moved"); 126 STATISTIC(NumSelectsExpanded, "Number of selects turned into branches"); 127 STATISTIC(NumStoreExtractExposed, "Number of store(extractelement) exposed"); 128 129 static cl::opt<bool> DisableBranchOpts( 130 "disable-cgp-branch-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 131 cl::desc("Disable branch optimizations in CodeGenPrepare")); 132 133 static cl::opt<bool> 134 DisableGCOpts("disable-cgp-gc-opts", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 135 cl::desc("Disable GC optimizations in CodeGenPrepare")); 136 137 static cl::opt<bool> DisableSelectToBranch( 138 "disable-cgp-select2branch", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 139 cl::desc("Disable select to branch conversion.")); 140 141 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkUsingGEPs( 142 "addr-sink-using-gep", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 143 cl::desc("Address sinking in CGP using GEPs.")); 144 145 static cl::opt<bool> EnableAndCmpSinking( 146 "enable-andcmp-sinking", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 147 cl::desc("Enable sinkinig and/cmp into branches.")); 148 149 static cl::opt<bool> DisableStoreExtract( 150 "disable-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 151 cl::desc("Disable store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare")); 152 153 static cl::opt<bool> StressStoreExtract( 154 "stress-cgp-store-extract", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 155 cl::desc("Stress test store(extract) optimizations in CodeGenPrepare")); 156 157 static cl::opt<bool> DisableExtLdPromotion( 158 "disable-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 159 cl::desc("Disable ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) optimization in " 160 "CodeGenPrepare")); 161 162 static cl::opt<bool> StressExtLdPromotion( 163 "stress-cgp-ext-ld-promotion", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 164 cl::desc("Stress test ext(promotable(ld)) -> promoted(ext(ld)) " 165 "optimization in CodeGenPrepare")); 166 167 static cl::opt<bool> DisablePreheaderProtect( 168 "disable-preheader-prot", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 169 cl::desc("Disable protection against removing loop preheaders")); 170 171 static cl::opt<bool> ProfileGuidedSectionPrefix( 172 "profile-guided-section-prefix", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), cl::ZeroOrMore, 173 cl::desc("Use profile info to add section prefix for hot/cold functions")); 174 175 static cl::opt<unsigned> FreqRatioToSkipMerge( 176 "cgp-freq-ratio-to-skip-merge", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2), 177 cl::desc("Skip merging empty blocks if (frequency of empty block) / " 178 "(frequency of destination block) is greater than this ratio")); 179 180 static cl::opt<bool> ForceSplitStore( 181 "force-split-store", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 182 cl::desc("Force store splitting no matter what the target query says.")); 183 184 static cl::opt<bool> 185 EnableTypePromotionMerge("cgp-type-promotion-merge", cl::Hidden, 186 cl::desc("Enable merging of redundant sexts when one is dominating" 187 " the other."), cl::init(true)); 188 189 static cl::opt<bool> DisableComplexAddrModes( 190 "disable-complex-addr-modes", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 191 cl::desc("Disables combining addressing modes with different parts " 192 "in optimizeMemoryInst.")); 193 194 static cl::opt<bool> 195 AddrSinkNewPhis("addr-sink-new-phis", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), 196 cl::desc("Allow creation of Phis in Address sinking.")); 197 198 static cl::opt<bool> 199 AddrSinkNewSelects("addr-sink-new-select", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 200 cl::desc("Allow creation of selects in Address sinking.")); 201 202 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineBaseReg( 203 "addr-sink-combine-base-reg", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 204 cl::desc("Allow combining of BaseReg field in Address sinking.")); 205 206 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineBaseGV( 207 "addr-sink-combine-base-gv", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 208 cl::desc("Allow combining of BaseGV field in Address sinking.")); 209 210 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineBaseOffs( 211 "addr-sink-combine-base-offs", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 212 cl::desc("Allow combining of BaseOffs field in Address sinking.")); 213 214 static cl::opt<bool> AddrSinkCombineScaledReg( 215 "addr-sink-combine-scaled-reg", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), 216 cl::desc("Allow combining of ScaledReg field in Address sinking.")); 217 218 static cl::opt<bool> 219 EnableGEPOffsetSplit("cgp-split-large-offset-gep", cl::Hidden, 220 cl::init(true), 221 cl::desc("Enable splitting large offset of GEP.")); 222 223 namespace { 224 225 enum ExtType { 226 ZeroExtension, // Zero extension has been seen. 227 SignExtension, // Sign extension has been seen. 228 BothExtension // This extension type is used if we saw sext after 229 // ZeroExtension had been set, or if we saw zext after 230 // SignExtension had been set. It makes the type 231 // information of a promoted instruction invalid. 232 }; 233 234 using SetOfInstrs = SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16>; 235 using TypeIsSExt = PointerIntPair<Type *, 2, ExtType>; 236 using InstrToOrigTy = DenseMap<Instruction *, TypeIsSExt>; 237 using SExts = SmallVector<Instruction *, 16>; 238 using ValueToSExts = DenseMap<Value *, SExts>; 239 240 class TypePromotionTransaction; 241 242 class CodeGenPrepare : public FunctionPass { 243 const TargetMachine *TM = nullptr; 244 const TargetSubtargetInfo *SubtargetInfo; 245 const TargetLowering *TLI = nullptr; 246 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI; 247 const TargetTransformInfo *TTI = nullptr; 248 const TargetLibraryInfo *TLInfo; 249 const LoopInfo *LI; 250 std::unique_ptr<BlockFrequencyInfo> BFI; 251 std::unique_ptr<BranchProbabilityInfo> BPI; 252 253 /// As we scan instructions optimizing them, this is the next instruction 254 /// to optimize. Transforms that can invalidate this should update it. 255 BasicBlock::iterator CurInstIterator; 256 257 /// Keeps track of non-local addresses that have been sunk into a block. 258 /// This allows us to avoid inserting duplicate code for blocks with 259 /// multiple load/stores of the same address. The usage of WeakTrackingVH 260 /// enables SunkAddrs to be treated as a cache whose entries can be 261 /// invalidated if a sunken address computation has been erased. 262 ValueMap<Value*, WeakTrackingVH> SunkAddrs; 263 264 /// Keeps track of all instructions inserted for the current function. 265 SetOfInstrs InsertedInsts; 266 267 /// Keeps track of the type of the related instruction before their 268 /// promotion for the current function. 269 InstrToOrigTy PromotedInsts; 270 271 /// Keep track of instructions removed during promotion. 272 SetOfInstrs RemovedInsts; 273 274 /// Keep track of sext chains based on their initial value. 275 DenseMap<Value *, Instruction *> SeenChainsForSExt; 276 277 /// Keep track of GEPs accessing the same data structures such as structs or 278 /// arrays that are candidates to be split later because of their large 279 /// size. 280 MapVector< 281 AssertingVH<Value>, 282 SmallVector<std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t>, 32>> 283 LargeOffsetGEPMap; 284 285 /// Keep track of new GEP base after splitting the GEPs having large offset. 286 SmallSet<AssertingVH<Value>, 2> NewGEPBases; 287 288 /// Map serial numbers to Large offset GEPs. 289 DenseMap<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int> LargeOffsetGEPID; 290 291 /// Keep track of SExt promoted. 292 ValueToSExts ValToSExtendedUses; 293 294 /// True if CFG is modified in any way. 295 bool ModifiedDT; 296 297 /// True if optimizing for size. 298 bool OptSize; 299 300 /// DataLayout for the Function being processed. 301 const DataLayout *DL = nullptr; 302 303 public: 304 static char ID; // Pass identification, replacement for typeid 305 306 CodeGenPrepare() : FunctionPass(ID) { 307 initializeCodeGenPreparePass(*PassRegistry::getPassRegistry()); 308 } 309 310 bool runOnFunction(Function &F) override; 311 312 StringRef getPassName() const override { return "CodeGen Prepare"; } 313 314 void getAnalysisUsage(AnalysisUsage &AU) const override { 315 // FIXME: When we can selectively preserve passes, preserve the domtree. 316 AU.addRequired<ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass>(); 317 AU.addRequired<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>(); 318 AU.addRequired<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>(); 319 AU.addRequired<LoopInfoWrapperPass>(); 320 } 321 322 private: 323 template <typename F> 324 void resetIteratorIfInvalidatedWhileCalling(BasicBlock *BB, F f) { 325 // Substituting can cause recursive simplifications, which can invalidate 326 // our iterator. Use a WeakTrackingVH to hold onto it in case this 327 // happens. 328 Value *CurValue = &*CurInstIterator; 329 WeakTrackingVH IterHandle(CurValue); 330 331 f(); 332 333 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the 334 // start of the block. 335 if (IterHandle != CurValue) { 336 CurInstIterator = BB->begin(); 337 SunkAddrs.clear(); 338 } 339 } 340 341 bool eliminateFallThrough(Function &F); 342 bool eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F); 343 BasicBlock *findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB); 344 bool canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB, const BasicBlock *DestBB) const; 345 void eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB); 346 bool isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *DestBB, 347 bool isPreheader); 348 bool optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool &ModifiedDT); 349 bool optimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool &ModifiedDT); 350 bool optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *MemoryInst, Value *Addr, 351 Type *AccessTy, unsigned AddrSpace); 352 bool optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS); 353 bool optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool &ModifiedDT); 354 bool optimizeExt(Instruction *&I); 355 bool optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I); 356 bool optimizeLoadExt(LoadInst *Load); 357 bool optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI); 358 bool optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI); 359 bool optimizeSwitchInst(SwitchInst *SI); 360 bool optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst); 361 bool dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB); 362 bool placeDbgValues(Function &F); 363 bool canFormExtLd(const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &MovedExts, 364 LoadInst *&LI, Instruction *&Inst, bool HasPromoted); 365 bool tryToPromoteExts(TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 366 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts, 367 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &ProfitablyMovedExts, 368 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0); 369 bool mergeSExts(Function &F); 370 bool splitLargeGEPOffsets(); 371 bool performAddressTypePromotion( 372 Instruction *&Inst, 373 bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader, 374 bool HasPromoted, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 375 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &SpeculativelyMovedExts); 376 bool splitBranchCondition(Function &F); 377 bool simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I); 378 379 bool tryToSinkFreeOperands(Instruction *I); 380 }; 381 382 } // end anonymous namespace 383 384 char CodeGenPrepare::ID = 0; 385 386 INITIALIZE_PASS_BEGIN(CodeGenPrepare, DEBUG_TYPE, 387 "Optimize for code generation", false, false) 388 INITIALIZE_PASS_DEPENDENCY(ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass) 389 INITIALIZE_PASS_END(CodeGenPrepare, DEBUG_TYPE, 390 "Optimize for code generation", false, false) 391 392 FunctionPass *llvm::createCodeGenPreparePass() { return new CodeGenPrepare(); } 393 394 bool CodeGenPrepare::runOnFunction(Function &F) { 395 if (skipFunction(F)) 396 return false; 397 398 DL = &F.getParent()->getDataLayout(); 399 400 bool EverMadeChange = false; 401 // Clear per function information. 402 InsertedInsts.clear(); 403 PromotedInsts.clear(); 404 405 ModifiedDT = false; 406 if (auto *TPC = getAnalysisIfAvailable<TargetPassConfig>()) { 407 TM = &TPC->getTM<TargetMachine>(); 408 SubtargetInfo = TM->getSubtargetImpl(F); 409 TLI = SubtargetInfo->getTargetLowering(); 410 TRI = SubtargetInfo->getRegisterInfo(); 411 } 412 TLInfo = &getAnalysis<TargetLibraryInfoWrapperPass>().getTLI(); 413 TTI = &getAnalysis<TargetTransformInfoWrapperPass>().getTTI(F); 414 LI = &getAnalysis<LoopInfoWrapperPass>().getLoopInfo(); 415 BPI.reset(new BranchProbabilityInfo(F, *LI)); 416 BFI.reset(new BlockFrequencyInfo(F, *BPI, *LI)); 417 OptSize = F.optForSize(); 418 419 ProfileSummaryInfo *PSI = 420 &getAnalysis<ProfileSummaryInfoWrapperPass>().getPSI(); 421 if (ProfileGuidedSectionPrefix) { 422 if (PSI->isFunctionHotInCallGraph(&F, *BFI)) 423 F.setSectionPrefix(".hot"); 424 else if (PSI->isFunctionColdInCallGraph(&F, *BFI)) 425 F.setSectionPrefix(".unlikely"); 426 } 427 428 /// This optimization identifies DIV instructions that can be 429 /// profitably bypassed and carried out with a shorter, faster divide. 430 if (!OptSize && !PSI->hasHugeWorkingSetSize() && TLI && 431 TLI->isSlowDivBypassed()) { 432 const DenseMap<unsigned int, unsigned int> &BypassWidths = 433 TLI->getBypassSlowDivWidths(); 434 BasicBlock* BB = &*F.begin(); 435 while (BB != nullptr) { 436 // bypassSlowDivision may create new BBs, but we don't want to reapply the 437 // optimization to those blocks. 438 BasicBlock* Next = BB->getNextNode(); 439 EverMadeChange |= bypassSlowDivision(BB, BypassWidths); 440 BB = Next; 441 } 442 } 443 444 // Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes and an 445 // unconditional branch. 446 EverMadeChange |= eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(F); 447 448 if (!DisableBranchOpts) 449 EverMadeChange |= splitBranchCondition(F); 450 451 // Split some critical edges where one of the sources is an indirect branch, 452 // to help generate sane code for PHIs involving such edges. 453 EverMadeChange |= SplitIndirectBrCriticalEdges(F); 454 455 bool MadeChange = true; 456 while (MadeChange) { 457 MadeChange = false; 458 for (Function::iterator I = F.begin(); I != F.end(); ) { 459 BasicBlock *BB = &*I++; 460 bool ModifiedDTOnIteration = false; 461 MadeChange |= optimizeBlock(*BB, ModifiedDTOnIteration); 462 463 // Restart BB iteration if the dominator tree of the Function was changed 464 if (ModifiedDTOnIteration) 465 break; 466 } 467 if (EnableTypePromotionMerge && !ValToSExtendedUses.empty()) 468 MadeChange |= mergeSExts(F); 469 if (!LargeOffsetGEPMap.empty()) 470 MadeChange |= splitLargeGEPOffsets(); 471 472 // Really free removed instructions during promotion. 473 for (Instruction *I : RemovedInsts) 474 I->deleteValue(); 475 476 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange; 477 SeenChainsForSExt.clear(); 478 ValToSExtendedUses.clear(); 479 RemovedInsts.clear(); 480 LargeOffsetGEPMap.clear(); 481 LargeOffsetGEPID.clear(); 482 } 483 484 SunkAddrs.clear(); 485 486 if (!DisableBranchOpts) { 487 MadeChange = false; 488 // Use a set vector to get deterministic iteration order. The order the 489 // blocks are removed may affect whether or not PHI nodes in successors 490 // are removed. 491 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 8> WorkList; 492 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) { 493 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 2> Successors(succ_begin(&BB), succ_end(&BB)); 494 MadeChange |= ConstantFoldTerminator(&BB, true); 495 if (!MadeChange) continue; 496 497 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator 498 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II) 499 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II)) 500 WorkList.insert(*II); 501 } 502 503 // Delete the dead blocks and any of their dead successors. 504 MadeChange |= !WorkList.empty(); 505 while (!WorkList.empty()) { 506 BasicBlock *BB = WorkList.pop_back_val(); 507 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 2> Successors(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB)); 508 509 DeleteDeadBlock(BB); 510 511 for (SmallVectorImpl<BasicBlock*>::iterator 512 II = Successors.begin(), IE = Successors.end(); II != IE; ++II) 513 if (pred_begin(*II) == pred_end(*II)) 514 WorkList.insert(*II); 515 } 516 517 // Merge pairs of basic blocks with unconditional branches, connected by 518 // a single edge. 519 if (EverMadeChange || MadeChange) 520 MadeChange |= eliminateFallThrough(F); 521 522 EverMadeChange |= MadeChange; 523 } 524 525 if (!DisableGCOpts) { 526 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Statepoints; 527 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) 528 for (Instruction &I : BB) 529 if (isStatepoint(I)) 530 Statepoints.push_back(&I); 531 for (auto &I : Statepoints) 532 EverMadeChange |= simplifyOffsetableRelocate(*I); 533 } 534 535 // Do this last to clean up use-before-def scenarios introduced by other 536 // preparatory transforms. 537 EverMadeChange |= placeDbgValues(F); 538 539 return EverMadeChange; 540 } 541 542 /// Merge basic blocks which are connected by a single edge, where one of the 543 /// basic blocks has a single successor pointing to the other basic block, 544 /// which has a single predecessor. 545 bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateFallThrough(Function &F) { 546 bool Changed = false; 547 // Scan all of the blocks in the function, except for the entry block. 548 // Use a temporary array to avoid iterator being invalidated when 549 // deleting blocks. 550 SmallVector<WeakTrackingVH, 16> Blocks; 551 for (auto &Block : llvm::make_range(std::next(F.begin()), F.end())) 552 Blocks.push_back(&Block); 553 554 for (auto &Block : Blocks) { 555 auto *BB = cast_or_null<BasicBlock>(Block); 556 if (!BB) 557 continue; 558 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial 559 // edge, just collapse it. 560 BasicBlock *SinglePred = BB->getSinglePredecessor(); 561 562 // Don't merge if BB's address is taken. 563 if (!SinglePred || SinglePred == BB || BB->hasAddressTaken()) continue; 564 565 BranchInst *Term = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(SinglePred->getTerminator()); 566 if (Term && !Term->isConditional()) { 567 Changed = true; 568 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "To merge:\n" << *BB << "\n\n\n"); 569 570 // Merge BB into SinglePred and delete it. 571 MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB); 572 } 573 } 574 return Changed; 575 } 576 577 /// Find a destination block from BB if BB is mergeable empty block. 578 BasicBlock *CodeGenPrepare::findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) { 579 // If this block doesn't end with an uncond branch, ignore it. 580 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator()); 581 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional()) 582 return nullptr; 583 584 // If the instruction before the branch (skipping debug info) isn't a phi 585 // node, then other stuff is happening here. 586 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BI->getIterator(); 587 if (BBI != BB->begin()) { 588 --BBI; 589 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) { 590 if (BBI == BB->begin()) 591 break; 592 --BBI; 593 } 594 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI) && !isa<PHINode>(BBI)) 595 return nullptr; 596 } 597 598 // Do not break infinite loops. 599 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0); 600 if (DestBB == BB) 601 return nullptr; 602 603 if (!canMergeBlocks(BB, DestBB)) 604 DestBB = nullptr; 605 606 return DestBB; 607 } 608 609 /// Eliminate blocks that contain only PHI nodes, debug info directives, and an 610 /// unconditional branch. Passes before isel (e.g. LSR/loopsimplify) often split 611 /// edges in ways that are non-optimal for isel. Start by eliminating these 612 /// blocks so we can split them the way we want them. 613 bool CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlocks(Function &F) { 614 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preheaders; 615 SmallVector<Loop *, 16> LoopList(LI->begin(), LI->end()); 616 while (!LoopList.empty()) { 617 Loop *L = LoopList.pop_back_val(); 618 LoopList.insert(LoopList.end(), L->begin(), L->end()); 619 if (BasicBlock *Preheader = L->getLoopPreheader()) 620 Preheaders.insert(Preheader); 621 } 622 623 bool MadeChange = false; 624 // Copy blocks into a temporary array to avoid iterator invalidation issues 625 // as we remove them. 626 // Note that this intentionally skips the entry block. 627 SmallVector<WeakTrackingVH, 16> Blocks; 628 for (auto &Block : llvm::make_range(std::next(F.begin()), F.end())) 629 Blocks.push_back(&Block); 630 631 for (auto &Block : Blocks) { 632 BasicBlock *BB = cast_or_null<BasicBlock>(Block); 633 if (!BB) 634 continue; 635 BasicBlock *DestBB = findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(BB); 636 if (!DestBB || 637 !isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BB, DestBB, Preheaders.count(BB))) 638 continue; 639 640 eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BB); 641 MadeChange = true; 642 } 643 return MadeChange; 644 } 645 646 bool CodeGenPrepare::isMergingEmptyBlockProfitable(BasicBlock *BB, 647 BasicBlock *DestBB, 648 bool isPreheader) { 649 // Do not delete loop preheaders if doing so would create a critical edge. 650 // Loop preheaders can be good locations to spill registers. If the 651 // preheader is deleted and we create a critical edge, registers may be 652 // spilled in the loop body instead. 653 if (!DisablePreheaderProtect && isPreheader && 654 !(BB->getSinglePredecessor() && 655 BB->getSinglePredecessor()->getSingleSuccessor())) 656 return false; 657 658 // Skip merging if the block's successor is also a successor to any callbr 659 // that leads to this block. 660 // FIXME: Is this really needed? Is this a correctness issue? 661 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) { 662 if (auto *CBI = dyn_cast<CallBrInst>((*PI)->getTerminator())) 663 for (unsigned i = 0, e = CBI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i) 664 if (DestBB == CBI->getSuccessor(i)) 665 return false; 666 } 667 668 // Try to skip merging if the unique predecessor of BB is terminated by a 669 // switch or indirect branch instruction, and BB is used as an incoming block 670 // of PHIs in DestBB. In such case, merging BB and DestBB would cause ISel to 671 // add COPY instructions in the predecessor of BB instead of BB (if it is not 672 // merged). Note that the critical edge created by merging such blocks wont be 673 // split in MachineSink because the jump table is not analyzable. By keeping 674 // such empty block (BB), ISel will place COPY instructions in BB, not in the 675 // predecessor of BB. 676 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getUniquePredecessor(); 677 if (!Pred || 678 !(isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()) || 679 isa<IndirectBrInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))) 680 return true; 681 682 if (BB->getTerminator() != BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) 683 return true; 684 685 // We use a simple cost heuristic which determine skipping merging is 686 // profitable if the cost of skipping merging is less than the cost of 687 // merging : Cost(skipping merging) < Cost(merging BB), where the 688 // Cost(skipping merging) is Freq(BB) * (Cost(Copy) + Cost(Branch)), and 689 // the Cost(merging BB) is Freq(Pred) * Cost(Copy). 690 // Assuming Cost(Copy) == Cost(Branch), we could simplify it to : 691 // Freq(Pred) / Freq(BB) > 2. 692 // Note that if there are multiple empty blocks sharing the same incoming 693 // value for the PHIs in the DestBB, we consider them together. In such 694 // case, Cost(merging BB) will be the sum of their frequencies. 695 696 if (!isa<PHINode>(DestBB->begin())) 697 return true; 698 699 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SameIncomingValueBBs; 700 701 // Find all other incoming blocks from which incoming values of all PHIs in 702 // DestBB are the same as the ones from BB. 703 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(DestBB), E = pred_end(DestBB); PI != E; 704 ++PI) { 705 BasicBlock *DestBBPred = *PI; 706 if (DestBBPred == BB) 707 continue; 708 709 if (llvm::all_of(DestBB->phis(), [&](const PHINode &DestPN) { 710 return DestPN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == 711 DestPN.getIncomingValueForBlock(DestBBPred); 712 })) 713 SameIncomingValueBBs.insert(DestBBPred); 714 } 715 716 // See if all BB's incoming values are same as the value from Pred. In this 717 // case, no reason to skip merging because COPYs are expected to be place in 718 // Pred already. 719 if (SameIncomingValueBBs.count(Pred)) 720 return true; 721 722 BlockFrequency PredFreq = BFI->getBlockFreq(Pred); 723 BlockFrequency BBFreq = BFI->getBlockFreq(BB); 724 725 for (auto SameValueBB : SameIncomingValueBBs) 726 if (SameValueBB->getUniquePredecessor() == Pred && 727 DestBB == findDestBlockOfMergeableEmptyBlock(SameValueBB)) 728 BBFreq += BFI->getBlockFreq(SameValueBB); 729 730 return PredFreq.getFrequency() <= 731 BBFreq.getFrequency() * FreqRatioToSkipMerge; 732 } 733 734 /// Return true if we can merge BB into DestBB if there is a single 735 /// unconditional branch between them, and BB contains no other non-phi 736 /// instructions. 737 bool CodeGenPrepare::canMergeBlocks(const BasicBlock *BB, 738 const BasicBlock *DestBB) const { 739 // We only want to eliminate blocks whose phi nodes are used by phi nodes in 740 // the successor. If there are more complex condition (e.g. preheaders), 741 // don't mess around with them. 742 for (const PHINode &PN : BB->phis()) { 743 for (const User *U : PN.users()) { 744 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 745 if (UI->getParent() != DestBB || !isa<PHINode>(UI)) 746 return false; 747 // If User is inside DestBB block and it is a PHINode then check 748 // incoming value. If incoming value is not from BB then this is 749 // a complex condition (e.g. preheaders) we want to avoid here. 750 if (UI->getParent() == DestBB) { 751 if (const PHINode *UPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(UI)) 752 for (unsigned I = 0, E = UPN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) { 753 Instruction *Insn = dyn_cast<Instruction>(UPN->getIncomingValue(I)); 754 if (Insn && Insn->getParent() == BB && 755 Insn->getParent() != UPN->getIncomingBlock(I)) 756 return false; 757 } 758 } 759 } 760 } 761 762 // If BB and DestBB contain any common predecessors, then the phi nodes in BB 763 // and DestBB may have conflicting incoming values for the block. If so, we 764 // can't merge the block. 765 const PHINode *DestBBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(DestBB->begin()); 766 if (!DestBBPN) return true; // no conflict. 767 768 // Collect the preds of BB. 769 SmallPtrSet<const BasicBlock*, 16> BBPreds; 770 if (const PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) { 771 // It is faster to get preds from a PHI than with pred_iterator. 772 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) 773 BBPreds.insert(BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i)); 774 } else { 775 BBPreds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB)); 776 } 777 778 // Walk the preds of DestBB. 779 for (unsigned i = 0, e = DestBBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) { 780 BasicBlock *Pred = DestBBPN->getIncomingBlock(i); 781 if (BBPreds.count(Pred)) { // Common predecessor? 782 for (const PHINode &PN : DestBB->phis()) { 783 const Value *V1 = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred); 784 const Value *V2 = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB); 785 786 // If V2 is a phi node in BB, look up what the mapped value will be. 787 if (const PHINode *V2PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V2)) 788 if (V2PN->getParent() == BB) 789 V2 = V2PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(Pred); 790 791 // If there is a conflict, bail out. 792 if (V1 != V2) return false; 793 } 794 } 795 } 796 797 return true; 798 } 799 800 /// Eliminate a basic block that has only phi's and an unconditional branch in 801 /// it. 802 void CodeGenPrepare::eliminateMostlyEmptyBlock(BasicBlock *BB) { 803 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator()); 804 BasicBlock *DestBB = BI->getSuccessor(0); 805 806 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "MERGING MOSTLY EMPTY BLOCKS - BEFORE:\n" 807 << *BB << *DestBB); 808 809 // If the destination block has a single pred, then this is a trivial edge, 810 // just collapse it. 811 if (BasicBlock *SinglePred = DestBB->getSinglePredecessor()) { 812 if (SinglePred != DestBB) { 813 assert(SinglePred == BB && 814 "Single predecessor not the same as predecessor"); 815 // Merge DestBB into SinglePred/BB and delete it. 816 MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(DestBB); 817 // Note: BB(=SinglePred) will not be deleted on this path. 818 // DestBB(=its single successor) is the one that was deleted. 819 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *SinglePred << "\n\n\n"); 820 return; 821 } 822 } 823 824 // Otherwise, we have multiple predecessors of BB. Update the PHIs in DestBB 825 // to handle the new incoming edges it is about to have. 826 for (PHINode &PN : DestBB->phis()) { 827 // Remove the incoming value for BB, and remember it. 828 Value *InVal = PN.removeIncomingValue(BB, false); 829 830 // Two options: either the InVal is a phi node defined in BB or it is some 831 // value that dominates BB. 832 PHINode *InValPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(InVal); 833 if (InValPhi && InValPhi->getParent() == BB) { 834 // Add all of the input values of the input PHI as inputs of this phi. 835 for (unsigned i = 0, e = InValPhi->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) 836 PN.addIncoming(InValPhi->getIncomingValue(i), 837 InValPhi->getIncomingBlock(i)); 838 } else { 839 // Otherwise, add one instance of the dominating value for each edge that 840 // we will be adding. 841 if (PHINode *BBPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) { 842 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBPN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) 843 PN.addIncoming(InVal, BBPN->getIncomingBlock(i)); 844 } else { 845 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) 846 PN.addIncoming(InVal, *PI); 847 } 848 } 849 } 850 851 // The PHIs are now updated, change everything that refers to BB to use 852 // DestBB and remove BB. 853 BB->replaceAllUsesWith(DestBB); 854 BB->eraseFromParent(); 855 ++NumBlocksElim; 856 857 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "AFTER:\n" << *DestBB << "\n\n\n"); 858 } 859 860 // Computes a map of base pointer relocation instructions to corresponding 861 // derived pointer relocation instructions given a vector of all relocate calls 862 static void computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap( 863 const SmallVectorImpl<GCRelocateInst *> &AllRelocateCalls, 864 DenseMap<GCRelocateInst *, SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2>> 865 &RelocateInstMap) { 866 // Collect information in two maps: one primarily for locating the base object 867 // while filling the second map; the second map is the final structure holding 868 // a mapping between Base and corresponding Derived relocate calls 869 DenseMap<std::pair<unsigned, unsigned>, GCRelocateInst *> RelocateIdxMap; 870 for (auto *ThisRelocate : AllRelocateCalls) { 871 auto K = std::make_pair(ThisRelocate->getBasePtrIndex(), 872 ThisRelocate->getDerivedPtrIndex()); 873 RelocateIdxMap.insert(std::make_pair(K, ThisRelocate)); 874 } 875 for (auto &Item : RelocateIdxMap) { 876 std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> Key = Item.first; 877 if (Key.first == Key.second) 878 // Base relocation: nothing to insert 879 continue; 880 881 GCRelocateInst *I = Item.second; 882 auto BaseKey = std::make_pair(Key.first, Key.first); 883 884 // We're iterating over RelocateIdxMap so we cannot modify it. 885 auto MaybeBase = RelocateIdxMap.find(BaseKey); 886 if (MaybeBase == RelocateIdxMap.end()) 887 // TODO: We might want to insert a new base object relocate and gep off 888 // that, if there are enough derived object relocates. 889 continue; 890 891 RelocateInstMap[MaybeBase->second].push_back(I); 892 } 893 } 894 895 // Accepts a GEP and extracts the operands into a vector provided they're all 896 // small integer constants 897 static bool getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(GetElementPtrInst *GEP, 898 SmallVectorImpl<Value *> &OffsetV) { 899 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++) { 900 // Only accept small constant integer operands 901 auto Op = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(GEP->getOperand(i)); 902 if (!Op || Op->getZExtValue() > 20) 903 return false; 904 } 905 906 for (unsigned i = 1; i < GEP->getNumOperands(); i++) 907 OffsetV.push_back(GEP->getOperand(i)); 908 return true; 909 } 910 911 // Takes a RelocatedBase (base pointer relocation instruction) and Targets to 912 // replace, computes a replacement, and affects it. 913 static bool 914 simplifyRelocatesOffABase(GCRelocateInst *RelocatedBase, 915 const SmallVectorImpl<GCRelocateInst *> &Targets) { 916 bool MadeChange = false; 917 // We must ensure the relocation of derived pointer is defined after 918 // relocation of base pointer. If we find a relocation corresponding to base 919 // defined earlier than relocation of base then we move relocation of base 920 // right before found relocation. We consider only relocation in the same 921 // basic block as relocation of base. Relocations from other basic block will 922 // be skipped by optimization and we do not care about them. 923 for (auto R = RelocatedBase->getParent()->getFirstInsertionPt(); 924 &*R != RelocatedBase; ++R) 925 if (auto RI = dyn_cast<GCRelocateInst>(R)) 926 if (RI->getStatepoint() == RelocatedBase->getStatepoint()) 927 if (RI->getBasePtrIndex() == RelocatedBase->getBasePtrIndex()) { 928 RelocatedBase->moveBefore(RI); 929 break; 930 } 931 932 for (GCRelocateInst *ToReplace : Targets) { 933 assert(ToReplace->getBasePtrIndex() == RelocatedBase->getBasePtrIndex() && 934 "Not relocating a derived object of the original base object"); 935 if (ToReplace->getBasePtrIndex() == ToReplace->getDerivedPtrIndex()) { 936 // A duplicate relocate call. TODO: coalesce duplicates. 937 continue; 938 } 939 940 if (RelocatedBase->getParent() != ToReplace->getParent()) { 941 // Base and derived relocates are in different basic blocks. 942 // In this case transform is only valid when base dominates derived 943 // relocate. However it would be too expensive to check dominance 944 // for each such relocate, so we skip the whole transformation. 945 continue; 946 } 947 948 Value *Base = ToReplace->getBasePtr(); 949 auto Derived = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(ToReplace->getDerivedPtr()); 950 if (!Derived || Derived->getPointerOperand() != Base) 951 continue; 952 953 SmallVector<Value *, 2> OffsetV; 954 if (!getGEPSmallConstantIntOffsetV(Derived, OffsetV)) 955 continue; 956 957 // Create a Builder and replace the target callsite with a gep 958 assert(RelocatedBase->getNextNode() && 959 "Should always have one since it's not a terminator"); 960 961 // Insert after RelocatedBase 962 IRBuilder<> Builder(RelocatedBase->getNextNode()); 963 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(ToReplace->getDebugLoc()); 964 965 // If gc_relocate does not match the actual type, cast it to the right type. 966 // In theory, there must be a bitcast after gc_relocate if the type does not 967 // match, and we should reuse it to get the derived pointer. But it could be 968 // cases like this: 969 // bb1: 970 // ... 971 // %g1 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...) 972 // br label %merge 973 // 974 // bb2: 975 // ... 976 // %g2 = call coldcc i8 addrspace(1)* @llvm.experimental.gc.relocate.p1i8(...) 977 // br label %merge 978 // 979 // merge: 980 // %p1 = phi i8 addrspace(1)* [ %g1, %bb1 ], [ %g2, %bb2 ] 981 // %cast = bitcast i8 addrspace(1)* %p1 in to i32 addrspace(1)* 982 // 983 // In this case, we can not find the bitcast any more. So we insert a new bitcast 984 // no matter there is already one or not. In this way, we can handle all cases, and 985 // the extra bitcast should be optimized away in later passes. 986 Value *ActualRelocatedBase = RelocatedBase; 987 if (RelocatedBase->getType() != Base->getType()) { 988 ActualRelocatedBase = 989 Builder.CreateBitCast(RelocatedBase, Base->getType()); 990 } 991 Value *Replacement = Builder.CreateGEP( 992 Derived->getSourceElementType(), ActualRelocatedBase, makeArrayRef(OffsetV)); 993 Replacement->takeName(ToReplace); 994 // If the newly generated derived pointer's type does not match the original derived 995 // pointer's type, cast the new derived pointer to match it. Same reasoning as above. 996 Value *ActualReplacement = Replacement; 997 if (Replacement->getType() != ToReplace->getType()) { 998 ActualReplacement = 999 Builder.CreateBitCast(Replacement, ToReplace->getType()); 1000 } 1001 ToReplace->replaceAllUsesWith(ActualReplacement); 1002 ToReplace->eraseFromParent(); 1003 1004 MadeChange = true; 1005 } 1006 return MadeChange; 1007 } 1008 1009 // Turns this: 1010 // 1011 // %base = ... 1012 // %ptr = gep %base + 15 1013 // %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr) 1014 // %base' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4) 1015 // %ptr' = relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 5) 1016 // %val = load %ptr' 1017 // 1018 // into this: 1019 // 1020 // %base = ... 1021 // %ptr = gep %base + 15 1022 // %tok = statepoint (%fun, i32 0, i32 0, i32 0, %base, %ptr) 1023 // %base' = gc.relocate(%tok, i32 4, i32 4) 1024 // %ptr' = gep %base' + 15 1025 // %val = load %ptr' 1026 bool CodeGenPrepare::simplifyOffsetableRelocate(Instruction &I) { 1027 bool MadeChange = false; 1028 SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2> AllRelocateCalls; 1029 1030 for (auto *U : I.users()) 1031 if (GCRelocateInst *Relocate = dyn_cast<GCRelocateInst>(U)) 1032 // Collect all the relocate calls associated with a statepoint 1033 AllRelocateCalls.push_back(Relocate); 1034 1035 // We need atleast one base pointer relocation + one derived pointer 1036 // relocation to mangle 1037 if (AllRelocateCalls.size() < 2) 1038 return false; 1039 1040 // RelocateInstMap is a mapping from the base relocate instruction to the 1041 // corresponding derived relocate instructions 1042 DenseMap<GCRelocateInst *, SmallVector<GCRelocateInst *, 2>> RelocateInstMap; 1043 computeBaseDerivedRelocateMap(AllRelocateCalls, RelocateInstMap); 1044 if (RelocateInstMap.empty()) 1045 return false; 1046 1047 for (auto &Item : RelocateInstMap) 1048 // Item.first is the RelocatedBase to offset against 1049 // Item.second is the vector of Targets to replace 1050 MadeChange = simplifyRelocatesOffABase(Item.first, Item.second); 1051 return MadeChange; 1052 } 1053 1054 /// SinkCast - Sink the specified cast instruction into its user blocks 1055 static bool SinkCast(CastInst *CI) { 1056 BasicBlock *DefBB = CI->getParent(); 1057 1058 /// InsertedCasts - Only insert a cast in each block once. 1059 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CastInst*> InsertedCasts; 1060 1061 bool MadeChange = false; 1062 for (Value::user_iterator UI = CI->user_begin(), E = CI->user_end(); 1063 UI != E; ) { 1064 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse(); 1065 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI); 1066 1067 // Figure out which BB this cast is used in. For PHI's this is the 1068 // appropriate predecessor block. 1069 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 1070 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User)) { 1071 UserBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(TheUse); 1072 } 1073 1074 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1075 ++UI; 1076 1077 // The first insertion point of a block containing an EH pad is after the 1078 // pad. If the pad is the user, we cannot sink the cast past the pad. 1079 if (User->isEHPad()) 1080 continue; 1081 1082 // If the block selected to receive the cast is an EH pad that does not 1083 // allow non-PHI instructions before the terminator, we can't sink the 1084 // cast. 1085 if (UserBB->getTerminator()->isEHPad()) 1086 continue; 1087 1088 // If this user is in the same block as the cast, don't change the cast. 1089 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 1090 1091 // If we have already inserted a cast into this block, use it. 1092 CastInst *&InsertedCast = InsertedCasts[UserBB]; 1093 1094 if (!InsertedCast) { 1095 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1096 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 1097 InsertedCast = CastInst::Create(CI->getOpcode(), CI->getOperand(0), 1098 CI->getType(), "", &*InsertPt); 1099 InsertedCast->setDebugLoc(CI->getDebugLoc()); 1100 } 1101 1102 // Replace a use of the cast with a use of the new cast. 1103 TheUse = InsertedCast; 1104 MadeChange = true; 1105 ++NumCastUses; 1106 } 1107 1108 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cast. 1109 if (CI->use_empty()) { 1110 salvageDebugInfo(*CI); 1111 CI->eraseFromParent(); 1112 MadeChange = true; 1113 } 1114 1115 return MadeChange; 1116 } 1117 1118 /// If the specified cast instruction is a noop copy (e.g. it's casting from 1119 /// one pointer type to another, i32->i8 on PPC), sink it into user blocks to 1120 /// reduce the number of virtual registers that must be created and coalesced. 1121 /// 1122 /// Return true if any changes are made. 1123 static bool OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CastInst *CI, const TargetLowering &TLI, 1124 const DataLayout &DL) { 1125 // Sink only "cheap" (or nop) address-space casts. This is a weaker condition 1126 // than sinking only nop casts, but is helpful on some platforms. 1127 if (auto *ASC = dyn_cast<AddrSpaceCastInst>(CI)) { 1128 if (!TLI.isCheapAddrSpaceCast(ASC->getSrcAddressSpace(), 1129 ASC->getDestAddressSpace())) 1130 return false; 1131 } 1132 1133 // If this is a noop copy, 1134 EVT SrcVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getOperand(0)->getType()); 1135 EVT DstVT = TLI.getValueType(DL, CI->getType()); 1136 1137 // This is an fp<->int conversion? 1138 if (SrcVT.isInteger() != DstVT.isInteger()) 1139 return false; 1140 1141 // If this is an extension, it will be a zero or sign extension, which 1142 // isn't a noop. 1143 if (SrcVT.bitsLT(DstVT)) return false; 1144 1145 // If these values will be promoted, find out what they will be promoted 1146 // to. This helps us consider truncates on PPC as noop copies when they 1147 // are. 1148 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), SrcVT) == 1149 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger) 1150 SrcVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), SrcVT); 1151 if (TLI.getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), DstVT) == 1152 TargetLowering::TypePromoteInteger) 1153 DstVT = TLI.getTypeToTransformTo(CI->getContext(), DstVT); 1154 1155 // If, after promotion, these are the same types, this is a noop copy. 1156 if (SrcVT != DstVT) 1157 return false; 1158 1159 return SinkCast(CI); 1160 } 1161 1162 static bool replaceMathCmpWithIntrinsic(BinaryOperator *BO, CmpInst *Cmp, 1163 Intrinsic::ID IID) { 1164 // We allow matching the canonical IR (add X, C) back to (usubo X, -C). 1165 Value *Arg0 = BO->getOperand(0); 1166 Value *Arg1 = BO->getOperand(1); 1167 if (BO->getOpcode() == Instruction::Add && 1168 IID == Intrinsic::usub_with_overflow) { 1169 assert(isa<Constant>(Arg1) && "Unexpected input for usubo"); 1170 Arg1 = ConstantExpr::getNeg(cast<Constant>(Arg1)); 1171 } 1172 1173 Instruction *InsertPt; 1174 if (BO->hasOneUse() && BO->user_back() == Cmp) { 1175 // If the math is only used by the compare, insert at the compare to keep 1176 // the condition in the same block as its users. (CGP aggressively sinks 1177 // compares to help out SDAG.) 1178 InsertPt = Cmp; 1179 } else { 1180 // The math and compare may be independent instructions. Check dominance to 1181 // determine the insertion point for the intrinsic. 1182 DominatorTree DT(*BO->getFunction()); 1183 bool MathDominates = DT.dominates(BO, Cmp); 1184 if (!MathDominates && !DT.dominates(Cmp, BO)) 1185 return false; 1186 InsertPt = MathDominates ? cast<Instruction>(BO) : cast<Instruction>(Cmp); 1187 } 1188 1189 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt); 1190 Value *MathOV = Builder.CreateBinaryIntrinsic(IID, Arg0, Arg1); 1191 Value *Math = Builder.CreateExtractValue(MathOV, 0, "math"); 1192 Value *OV = Builder.CreateExtractValue(MathOV, 1, "ov"); 1193 BO->replaceAllUsesWith(Math); 1194 Cmp->replaceAllUsesWith(OV); 1195 BO->eraseFromParent(); 1196 Cmp->eraseFromParent(); 1197 return true; 1198 } 1199 1200 /// Match special-case patterns that check for unsigned add overflow. 1201 static bool matchUAddWithOverflowConstantEdgeCases(CmpInst *Cmp, 1202 BinaryOperator *&Add) { 1203 // Add = add A, 1; Cmp = icmp eq A,-1 (overflow if A is max val) 1204 // Add = add A,-1; Cmp = icmp ne A, 0 (overflow if A is non-zero) 1205 Value *A = Cmp->getOperand(0), *B = Cmp->getOperand(1); 1206 1207 // We are not expecting non-canonical/degenerate code. Just bail out. 1208 if (isa<Constant>(A)) 1209 return false; 1210 1211 ICmpInst::Predicate Pred = Cmp->getPredicate(); 1212 if (Pred == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ && match(B, m_AllOnes())) 1213 B = ConstantInt::get(B->getType(), 1); 1214 else if (Pred == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE && match(B, m_ZeroInt())) 1215 B = ConstantInt::get(B->getType(), -1); 1216 else 1217 return false; 1218 1219 // Check the users of the variable operand of the compare looking for an add 1220 // with the adjusted constant. 1221 for (User *U : A->users()) { 1222 if (match(U, m_Add(m_Specific(A), m_Specific(B)))) { 1223 Add = cast<BinaryOperator>(U); 1224 return true; 1225 } 1226 } 1227 return false; 1228 } 1229 1230 /// Try to combine the compare into a call to the llvm.uadd.with.overflow 1231 /// intrinsic. Return true if any changes were made. 1232 static bool combineToUAddWithOverflow(CmpInst *Cmp, const TargetLowering &TLI, 1233 const DataLayout &DL, bool &ModifiedDT) { 1234 Value *A, *B; 1235 BinaryOperator *Add; 1236 if (!match(Cmp, m_UAddWithOverflow(m_Value(A), m_Value(B), m_BinOp(Add)))) 1237 if (!matchUAddWithOverflowConstantEdgeCases(Cmp, Add)) 1238 return false; 1239 1240 if (!TLI.shouldFormOverflowOp(ISD::UADDO, 1241 TLI.getValueType(DL, Add->getType()))) 1242 return false; 1243 1244 // We don't want to move around uses of condition values this late, so we 1245 // check if it is legal to create the call to the intrinsic in the basic 1246 // block containing the icmp. 1247 if (Add->getParent() != Cmp->getParent() && !Add->hasOneUse()) 1248 return false; 1249 1250 if (!replaceMathCmpWithIntrinsic(Add, Cmp, Intrinsic::uadd_with_overflow)) 1251 return false; 1252 1253 // Reset callers - do not crash by iterating over a dead instruction. 1254 ModifiedDT = true; 1255 return true; 1256 } 1257 1258 static bool combineToUSubWithOverflow(CmpInst *Cmp, const TargetLowering &TLI, 1259 const DataLayout &DL, bool &ModifiedDT) { 1260 // Convert (A u> B) to (A u< B) to simplify pattern matching. 1261 Value *A = Cmp->getOperand(0), *B = Cmp->getOperand(1); 1262 ICmpInst::Predicate Pred = Cmp->getPredicate(); 1263 if (Pred == ICmpInst::ICMP_UGT) { 1264 std::swap(A, B); 1265 Pred = ICmpInst::ICMP_ULT; 1266 } 1267 // Convert special-case: (A == 0) is the same as (A u< 1). 1268 if (Pred == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ && match(B, m_ZeroInt())) { 1269 B = ConstantInt::get(B->getType(), 1); 1270 Pred = ICmpInst::ICMP_ULT; 1271 } 1272 // Convert special-case: (A != 0) is the same as (0 u< A). 1273 if (Pred == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE && match(B, m_ZeroInt())) { 1274 std::swap(A, B); 1275 Pred = ICmpInst::ICMP_ULT; 1276 } 1277 if (Pred != ICmpInst::ICMP_ULT) 1278 return false; 1279 1280 // Walk the users of a variable operand of a compare looking for a subtract or 1281 // add with that same operand. Also match the 2nd operand of the compare to 1282 // the add/sub, but that may be a negated constant operand of an add. 1283 Value *CmpVariableOperand = isa<Constant>(A) ? B : A; 1284 BinaryOperator *Sub = nullptr; 1285 for (User *U : CmpVariableOperand->users()) { 1286 // A - B, A u< B --> usubo(A, B) 1287 if (match(U, m_Sub(m_Specific(A), m_Specific(B)))) { 1288 Sub = cast<BinaryOperator>(U); 1289 break; 1290 } 1291 1292 // A + (-C), A u< C (canonicalized form of (sub A, C)) 1293 const APInt *CmpC, *AddC; 1294 if (match(U, m_Add(m_Specific(A), m_APInt(AddC))) && 1295 match(B, m_APInt(CmpC)) && *AddC == -(*CmpC)) { 1296 Sub = cast<BinaryOperator>(U); 1297 break; 1298 } 1299 } 1300 if (!Sub) 1301 return false; 1302 1303 if (!TLI.shouldFormOverflowOp(ISD::USUBO, 1304 TLI.getValueType(DL, Sub->getType()))) 1305 return false; 1306 1307 if (!replaceMathCmpWithIntrinsic(Sub, Cmp, Intrinsic::usub_with_overflow)) 1308 return false; 1309 1310 // Reset callers - do not crash by iterating over a dead instruction. 1311 ModifiedDT = true; 1312 return true; 1313 } 1314 1315 /// Sink the given CmpInst into user blocks to reduce the number of virtual 1316 /// registers that must be created and coalesced. This is a clear win except on 1317 /// targets with multiple condition code registers (PowerPC), where it might 1318 /// lose; some adjustment may be wanted there. 1319 /// 1320 /// Return true if any changes are made. 1321 static bool sinkCmpExpression(CmpInst *Cmp, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 1322 if (TLI.hasMultipleConditionRegisters()) 1323 return false; 1324 1325 // Avoid sinking soft-FP comparisons, since this can move them into a loop. 1326 if (TLI.useSoftFloat() && isa<FCmpInst>(Cmp)) 1327 return false; 1328 1329 // Only insert a cmp in each block once. 1330 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, CmpInst*> InsertedCmps; 1331 1332 bool MadeChange = false; 1333 for (Value::user_iterator UI = Cmp->user_begin(), E = Cmp->user_end(); 1334 UI != E; ) { 1335 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse(); 1336 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI); 1337 1338 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1339 ++UI; 1340 1341 // Don't bother for PHI nodes. 1342 if (isa<PHINode>(User)) 1343 continue; 1344 1345 // Figure out which BB this cmp is used in. 1346 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 1347 BasicBlock *DefBB = Cmp->getParent(); 1348 1349 // If this user is in the same block as the cmp, don't change the cmp. 1350 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 1351 1352 // If we have already inserted a cmp into this block, use it. 1353 CmpInst *&InsertedCmp = InsertedCmps[UserBB]; 1354 1355 if (!InsertedCmp) { 1356 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1357 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 1358 InsertedCmp = 1359 CmpInst::Create(Cmp->getOpcode(), Cmp->getPredicate(), 1360 Cmp->getOperand(0), Cmp->getOperand(1), "", 1361 &*InsertPt); 1362 // Propagate the debug info. 1363 InsertedCmp->setDebugLoc(Cmp->getDebugLoc()); 1364 } 1365 1366 // Replace a use of the cmp with a use of the new cmp. 1367 TheUse = InsertedCmp; 1368 MadeChange = true; 1369 ++NumCmpUses; 1370 } 1371 1372 // If we removed all uses, nuke the cmp. 1373 if (Cmp->use_empty()) { 1374 Cmp->eraseFromParent(); 1375 MadeChange = true; 1376 } 1377 1378 return MadeChange; 1379 } 1380 1381 static bool optimizeCmp(CmpInst *Cmp, const TargetLowering &TLI, 1382 const DataLayout &DL, bool &ModifiedDT) { 1383 if (sinkCmpExpression(Cmp, TLI)) 1384 return true; 1385 1386 if (combineToUAddWithOverflow(Cmp, TLI, DL, ModifiedDT)) 1387 return true; 1388 1389 if (combineToUSubWithOverflow(Cmp, TLI, DL, ModifiedDT)) 1390 return true; 1391 1392 return false; 1393 } 1394 1395 /// Duplicate and sink the given 'and' instruction into user blocks where it is 1396 /// used in a compare to allow isel to generate better code for targets where 1397 /// this operation can be combined. 1398 /// 1399 /// Return true if any changes are made. 1400 static bool sinkAndCmp0Expression(Instruction *AndI, 1401 const TargetLowering &TLI, 1402 SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts) { 1403 // Double-check that we're not trying to optimize an instruction that was 1404 // already optimized by some other part of this pass. 1405 assert(!InsertedInsts.count(AndI) && 1406 "Attempting to optimize already optimized and instruction"); 1407 (void) InsertedInsts; 1408 1409 // Nothing to do for single use in same basic block. 1410 if (AndI->hasOneUse() && 1411 AndI->getParent() == cast<Instruction>(*AndI->user_begin())->getParent()) 1412 return false; 1413 1414 // Try to avoid cases where sinking/duplicating is likely to increase register 1415 // pressure. 1416 if (!isa<ConstantInt>(AndI->getOperand(0)) && 1417 !isa<ConstantInt>(AndI->getOperand(1)) && 1418 AndI->getOperand(0)->hasOneUse() && AndI->getOperand(1)->hasOneUse()) 1419 return false; 1420 1421 for (auto *U : AndI->users()) { 1422 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U); 1423 1424 // Only sink for and mask feeding icmp with 0. 1425 if (!isa<ICmpInst>(User)) 1426 return false; 1427 1428 auto *CmpC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1)); 1429 if (!CmpC || !CmpC->isZero()) 1430 return false; 1431 } 1432 1433 if (!TLI.isMaskAndCmp0FoldingBeneficial(*AndI)) 1434 return false; 1435 1436 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "found 'and' feeding only icmp 0;\n"); 1437 LLVM_DEBUG(AndI->getParent()->dump()); 1438 1439 // Push the 'and' into the same block as the icmp 0. There should only be 1440 // one (icmp (and, 0)) in each block, since CSE/GVN should have removed any 1441 // others, so we don't need to keep track of which BBs we insert into. 1442 for (Value::user_iterator UI = AndI->user_begin(), E = AndI->user_end(); 1443 UI != E; ) { 1444 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse(); 1445 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI); 1446 1447 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1448 ++UI; 1449 1450 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "sinking 'and' use: " << *User << "\n"); 1451 1452 // Keep the 'and' in the same place if the use is already in the same block. 1453 Instruction *InsertPt = 1454 User->getParent() == AndI->getParent() ? AndI : User; 1455 Instruction *InsertedAnd = 1456 BinaryOperator::Create(Instruction::And, AndI->getOperand(0), 1457 AndI->getOperand(1), "", InsertPt); 1458 // Propagate the debug info. 1459 InsertedAnd->setDebugLoc(AndI->getDebugLoc()); 1460 1461 // Replace a use of the 'and' with a use of the new 'and'. 1462 TheUse = InsertedAnd; 1463 ++NumAndUses; 1464 LLVM_DEBUG(User->getParent()->dump()); 1465 } 1466 1467 // We removed all uses, nuke the and. 1468 AndI->eraseFromParent(); 1469 return true; 1470 } 1471 1472 /// Check if the candidates could be combined with a shift instruction, which 1473 /// includes: 1474 /// 1. Truncate instruction 1475 /// 2. And instruction and the imm is a mask of the low bits: 1476 /// imm & (imm+1) == 0 1477 static bool isExtractBitsCandidateUse(Instruction *User) { 1478 if (!isa<TruncInst>(User)) { 1479 if (User->getOpcode() != Instruction::And || 1480 !isa<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1))) 1481 return false; 1482 1483 const APInt &Cimm = cast<ConstantInt>(User->getOperand(1))->getValue(); 1484 1485 if ((Cimm & (Cimm + 1)).getBoolValue()) 1486 return false; 1487 } 1488 return true; 1489 } 1490 1491 /// Sink both shift and truncate instruction to the use of truncate's BB. 1492 static bool 1493 SinkShiftAndTruncate(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, Instruction *User, ConstantInt *CI, 1494 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> &InsertedShifts, 1495 const TargetLowering &TLI, const DataLayout &DL) { 1496 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 1497 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, CastInst *> InsertedTruncs; 1498 TruncInst *TruncI = dyn_cast<TruncInst>(User); 1499 bool MadeChange = false; 1500 1501 for (Value::user_iterator TruncUI = TruncI->user_begin(), 1502 TruncE = TruncI->user_end(); 1503 TruncUI != TruncE;) { 1504 1505 Use &TruncTheUse = TruncUI.getUse(); 1506 Instruction *TruncUser = cast<Instruction>(*TruncUI); 1507 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1508 1509 ++TruncUI; 1510 1511 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(TruncUser->getOpcode()); 1512 if (!ISDOpcode) 1513 continue; 1514 1515 // If the use is actually a legal node, there will not be an 1516 // implicit truncate. 1517 // FIXME: always querying the result type is just an 1518 // approximation; some nodes' legality is determined by the 1519 // operand or other means. There's no good way to find out though. 1520 if (TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom( 1521 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, TruncUser->getType(), true))) 1522 continue; 1523 1524 // Don't bother for PHI nodes. 1525 if (isa<PHINode>(TruncUser)) 1526 continue; 1527 1528 BasicBlock *TruncUserBB = TruncUser->getParent(); 1529 1530 if (UserBB == TruncUserBB) 1531 continue; 1532 1533 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[TruncUserBB]; 1534 CastInst *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[TruncUserBB]; 1535 1536 if (!InsertedShift && !InsertedTrunc) { 1537 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1538 assert(InsertPt != TruncUserBB->end()); 1539 // Sink the shift 1540 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr) 1541 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, 1542 "", &*InsertPt); 1543 else 1544 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, 1545 "", &*InsertPt); 1546 InsertedShift->setDebugLoc(ShiftI->getDebugLoc()); 1547 1548 // Sink the trunc 1549 BasicBlock::iterator TruncInsertPt = TruncUserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1550 TruncInsertPt++; 1551 assert(TruncInsertPt != TruncUserBB->end()); 1552 1553 InsertedTrunc = CastInst::Create(TruncI->getOpcode(), InsertedShift, 1554 TruncI->getType(), "", &*TruncInsertPt); 1555 InsertedTrunc->setDebugLoc(TruncI->getDebugLoc()); 1556 1557 MadeChange = true; 1558 1559 TruncTheUse = InsertedTrunc; 1560 } 1561 } 1562 return MadeChange; 1563 } 1564 1565 /// Sink the shift *right* instruction into user blocks if the uses could 1566 /// potentially be combined with this shift instruction and generate BitExtract 1567 /// instruction. It will only be applied if the architecture supports BitExtract 1568 /// instruction. Here is an example: 1569 /// BB1: 1570 /// %x.extract.shift = lshr i64 %arg1, 32 1571 /// BB2: 1572 /// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift to i16 1573 /// ==> 1574 /// 1575 /// BB2: 1576 /// %x.extract.shift.1 = lshr i64 %arg1, 32 1577 /// %x.extract.trunc = trunc i64 %x.extract.shift.1 to i16 1578 /// 1579 /// CodeGen will recognize the pattern in BB2 and generate BitExtract 1580 /// instruction. 1581 /// Return true if any changes are made. 1582 static bool OptimizeExtractBits(BinaryOperator *ShiftI, ConstantInt *CI, 1583 const TargetLowering &TLI, 1584 const DataLayout &DL) { 1585 BasicBlock *DefBB = ShiftI->getParent(); 1586 1587 /// Only insert instructions in each block once. 1588 DenseMap<BasicBlock *, BinaryOperator *> InsertedShifts; 1589 1590 bool shiftIsLegal = TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, ShiftI->getType())); 1591 1592 bool MadeChange = false; 1593 for (Value::user_iterator UI = ShiftI->user_begin(), E = ShiftI->user_end(); 1594 UI != E;) { 1595 Use &TheUse = UI.getUse(); 1596 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(*UI); 1597 // Preincrement use iterator so we don't invalidate it. 1598 ++UI; 1599 1600 // Don't bother for PHI nodes. 1601 if (isa<PHINode>(User)) 1602 continue; 1603 1604 if (!isExtractBitsCandidateUse(User)) 1605 continue; 1606 1607 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 1608 1609 if (UserBB == DefBB) { 1610 // If the shift and truncate instruction are in the same BB. The use of 1611 // the truncate(TruncUse) may still introduce another truncate if not 1612 // legal. In this case, we would like to sink both shift and truncate 1613 // instruction to the BB of TruncUse. 1614 // for example: 1615 // BB1: 1616 // i64 shift.result = lshr i64 opnd, imm 1617 // trunc.result = trunc shift.result to i16 1618 // 1619 // BB2: 1620 // ----> We will have an implicit truncate here if the architecture does 1621 // not have i16 compare. 1622 // cmp i16 trunc.result, opnd2 1623 // 1624 if (isa<TruncInst>(User) && shiftIsLegal 1625 // If the type of the truncate is legal, no truncate will be 1626 // introduced in other basic blocks. 1627 && 1628 (!TLI.isTypeLegal(TLI.getValueType(DL, User->getType())))) 1629 MadeChange = 1630 SinkShiftAndTruncate(ShiftI, User, CI, InsertedShifts, TLI, DL); 1631 1632 continue; 1633 } 1634 // If we have already inserted a shift into this block, use it. 1635 BinaryOperator *&InsertedShift = InsertedShifts[UserBB]; 1636 1637 if (!InsertedShift) { 1638 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 1639 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 1640 1641 if (ShiftI->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr) 1642 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateAShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, 1643 "", &*InsertPt); 1644 else 1645 InsertedShift = BinaryOperator::CreateLShr(ShiftI->getOperand(0), CI, 1646 "", &*InsertPt); 1647 InsertedShift->setDebugLoc(ShiftI->getDebugLoc()); 1648 1649 MadeChange = true; 1650 } 1651 1652 // Replace a use of the shift with a use of the new shift. 1653 TheUse = InsertedShift; 1654 } 1655 1656 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shift. 1657 if (ShiftI->use_empty()) { 1658 salvageDebugInfo(*ShiftI); 1659 ShiftI->eraseFromParent(); 1660 } 1661 1662 return MadeChange; 1663 } 1664 1665 /// If counting leading or trailing zeros is an expensive operation and a zero 1666 /// input is defined, add a check for zero to avoid calling the intrinsic. 1667 /// 1668 /// We want to transform: 1669 /// %z = call i64 @llvm.cttz.i64(i64 %A, i1 false) 1670 /// 1671 /// into: 1672 /// entry: 1673 /// %cmpz = icmp eq i64 %A, 0 1674 /// br i1 %cmpz, label %cond.end, label %cond.false 1675 /// cond.false: 1676 /// %z = call i64 @llvm.cttz.i64(i64 %A, i1 true) 1677 /// br label %cond.end 1678 /// cond.end: 1679 /// %ctz = phi i64 [ 64, %entry ], [ %z, %cond.false ] 1680 /// 1681 /// If the transform is performed, return true and set ModifiedDT to true. 1682 static bool despeculateCountZeros(IntrinsicInst *CountZeros, 1683 const TargetLowering *TLI, 1684 const DataLayout *DL, 1685 bool &ModifiedDT) { 1686 if (!TLI || !DL) 1687 return false; 1688 1689 // If a zero input is undefined, it doesn't make sense to despeculate that. 1690 if (match(CountZeros->getOperand(1), m_One())) 1691 return false; 1692 1693 // If it's cheap to speculate, there's nothing to do. 1694 auto IntrinsicID = CountZeros->getIntrinsicID(); 1695 if ((IntrinsicID == Intrinsic::cttz && TLI->isCheapToSpeculateCttz()) || 1696 (IntrinsicID == Intrinsic::ctlz && TLI->isCheapToSpeculateCtlz())) 1697 return false; 1698 1699 // Only handle legal scalar cases. Anything else requires too much work. 1700 Type *Ty = CountZeros->getType(); 1701 unsigned SizeInBits = Ty->getPrimitiveSizeInBits(); 1702 if (Ty->isVectorTy() || SizeInBits > DL->getLargestLegalIntTypeSizeInBits()) 1703 return false; 1704 1705 // The intrinsic will be sunk behind a compare against zero and branch. 1706 BasicBlock *StartBlock = CountZeros->getParent(); 1707 BasicBlock *CallBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(CountZeros, "cond.false"); 1708 1709 // Create another block after the count zero intrinsic. A PHI will be added 1710 // in this block to select the result of the intrinsic or the bit-width 1711 // constant if the input to the intrinsic is zero. 1712 BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(CountZeros)); 1713 BasicBlock *EndBlock = CallBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "cond.end"); 1714 1715 // Set up a builder to create a compare, conditional branch, and PHI. 1716 IRBuilder<> Builder(CountZeros->getContext()); 1717 Builder.SetInsertPoint(StartBlock->getTerminator()); 1718 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(CountZeros->getDebugLoc()); 1719 1720 // Replace the unconditional branch that was created by the first split with 1721 // a compare against zero and a conditional branch. 1722 Value *Zero = Constant::getNullValue(Ty); 1723 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpEQ(CountZeros->getOperand(0), Zero, "cmpz"); 1724 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, EndBlock, CallBlock); 1725 StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent(); 1726 1727 // Create a PHI in the end block to select either the output of the intrinsic 1728 // or the bit width of the operand. 1729 Builder.SetInsertPoint(&EndBlock->front()); 1730 PHINode *PN = Builder.CreatePHI(Ty, 2, "ctz"); 1731 CountZeros->replaceAllUsesWith(PN); 1732 Value *BitWidth = Builder.getInt(APInt(SizeInBits, SizeInBits)); 1733 PN->addIncoming(BitWidth, StartBlock); 1734 PN->addIncoming(CountZeros, CallBlock); 1735 1736 // We are explicitly handling the zero case, so we can set the intrinsic's 1737 // undefined zero argument to 'true'. This will also prevent reprocessing the 1738 // intrinsic; we only despeculate when a zero input is defined. 1739 CountZeros->setArgOperand(1, Builder.getTrue()); 1740 ModifiedDT = true; 1741 return true; 1742 } 1743 1744 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeCallInst(CallInst *CI, bool &ModifiedDT) { 1745 BasicBlock *BB = CI->getParent(); 1746 1747 // Lower inline assembly if we can. 1748 // If we found an inline asm expession, and if the target knows how to 1749 // lower it to normal LLVM code, do so now. 1750 if (TLI && isa<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue())) { 1751 if (TLI->ExpandInlineAsm(CI)) { 1752 // Avoid invalidating the iterator. 1753 CurInstIterator = BB->begin(); 1754 // Avoid processing instructions out of order, which could cause 1755 // reuse before a value is defined. 1756 SunkAddrs.clear(); 1757 return true; 1758 } 1759 // Sink address computing for memory operands into the block. 1760 if (optimizeInlineAsmInst(CI)) 1761 return true; 1762 } 1763 1764 // Align the pointer arguments to this call if the target thinks it's a good 1765 // idea 1766 unsigned MinSize, PrefAlign; 1767 if (TLI && TLI->shouldAlignPointerArgs(CI, MinSize, PrefAlign)) { 1768 for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) { 1769 // We want to align both objects whose address is used directly and 1770 // objects whose address is used in casts and GEPs, though it only makes 1771 // sense for GEPs if the offset is a multiple of the desired alignment and 1772 // if size - offset meets the size threshold. 1773 if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy()) 1774 continue; 1775 APInt Offset(DL->getIndexSizeInBits( 1776 cast<PointerType>(Arg->getType())->getAddressSpace()), 1777 0); 1778 Value *Val = Arg->stripAndAccumulateInBoundsConstantOffsets(*DL, Offset); 1779 uint64_t Offset2 = Offset.getLimitedValue(); 1780 if ((Offset2 & (PrefAlign-1)) != 0) 1781 continue; 1782 AllocaInst *AI; 1783 if ((AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val)) && AI->getAlignment() < PrefAlign && 1784 DL->getTypeAllocSize(AI->getAllocatedType()) >= MinSize + Offset2) 1785 AI->setAlignment(PrefAlign); 1786 // Global variables can only be aligned if they are defined in this 1787 // object (i.e. they are uniquely initialized in this object), and 1788 // over-aligning global variables that have an explicit section is 1789 // forbidden. 1790 GlobalVariable *GV; 1791 if ((GV = dyn_cast<GlobalVariable>(Val)) && GV->canIncreaseAlignment() && 1792 GV->getPointerAlignment(*DL) < PrefAlign && 1793 DL->getTypeAllocSize(GV->getValueType()) >= 1794 MinSize + Offset2) 1795 GV->setAlignment(PrefAlign); 1796 } 1797 // If this is a memcpy (or similar) then we may be able to improve the 1798 // alignment 1799 if (MemIntrinsic *MI = dyn_cast<MemIntrinsic>(CI)) { 1800 unsigned DestAlign = getKnownAlignment(MI->getDest(), *DL); 1801 if (DestAlign > MI->getDestAlignment()) 1802 MI->setDestAlignment(DestAlign); 1803 if (MemTransferInst *MTI = dyn_cast<MemTransferInst>(MI)) { 1804 unsigned SrcAlign = getKnownAlignment(MTI->getSource(), *DL); 1805 if (SrcAlign > MTI->getSourceAlignment()) 1806 MTI->setSourceAlignment(SrcAlign); 1807 } 1808 } 1809 } 1810 1811 // If we have a cold call site, try to sink addressing computation into the 1812 // cold block. This interacts with our handling for loads and stores to 1813 // ensure that we can fold all uses of a potential addressing computation 1814 // into their uses. TODO: generalize this to work over profiling data 1815 if (!OptSize && CI->hasFnAttr(Attribute::Cold)) 1816 for (auto &Arg : CI->arg_operands()) { 1817 if (!Arg->getType()->isPointerTy()) 1818 continue; 1819 unsigned AS = Arg->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 1820 return optimizeMemoryInst(CI, Arg, Arg->getType(), AS); 1821 } 1822 1823 IntrinsicInst *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(CI); 1824 if (II) { 1825 switch (II->getIntrinsicID()) { 1826 default: break; 1827 case Intrinsic::experimental_widenable_condition: { 1828 // Give up on future widening oppurtunties so that we can fold away dead 1829 // paths and merge blocks before going into block-local instruction 1830 // selection. 1831 if (II->use_empty()) { 1832 II->eraseFromParent(); 1833 return true; 1834 } 1835 Constant *RetVal = ConstantInt::getTrue(II->getContext()); 1836 resetIteratorIfInvalidatedWhileCalling(BB, [&]() { 1837 replaceAndRecursivelySimplify(CI, RetVal, TLInfo, nullptr); 1838 }); 1839 return true; 1840 } 1841 case Intrinsic::objectsize: { 1842 // Lower all uses of llvm.objectsize.* 1843 Value *RetVal = 1844 lowerObjectSizeCall(II, *DL, TLInfo, /*MustSucceed=*/true); 1845 1846 resetIteratorIfInvalidatedWhileCalling(BB, [&]() { 1847 replaceAndRecursivelySimplify(CI, RetVal, TLInfo, nullptr); 1848 }); 1849 return true; 1850 } 1851 case Intrinsic::is_constant: { 1852 // If is_constant hasn't folded away yet, lower it to false now. 1853 Constant *RetVal = ConstantInt::get(II->getType(), 0); 1854 resetIteratorIfInvalidatedWhileCalling(BB, [&]() { 1855 replaceAndRecursivelySimplify(CI, RetVal, TLInfo, nullptr); 1856 }); 1857 return true; 1858 } 1859 case Intrinsic::aarch64_stlxr: 1860 case Intrinsic::aarch64_stxr: { 1861 ZExtInst *ExtVal = dyn_cast<ZExtInst>(CI->getArgOperand(0)); 1862 if (!ExtVal || !ExtVal->hasOneUse() || 1863 ExtVal->getParent() == CI->getParent()) 1864 return false; 1865 // Sink a zext feeding stlxr/stxr before it, so it can be folded into it. 1866 ExtVal->moveBefore(CI); 1867 // Mark this instruction as "inserted by CGP", so that other 1868 // optimizations don't touch it. 1869 InsertedInsts.insert(ExtVal); 1870 return true; 1871 } 1872 1873 case Intrinsic::launder_invariant_group: 1874 case Intrinsic::strip_invariant_group: { 1875 Value *ArgVal = II->getArgOperand(0); 1876 auto it = LargeOffsetGEPMap.find(II); 1877 if (it != LargeOffsetGEPMap.end()) { 1878 // Merge entries in LargeOffsetGEPMap to reflect the RAUW. 1879 // Make sure not to have to deal with iterator invalidation 1880 // after possibly adding ArgVal to LargeOffsetGEPMap. 1881 auto GEPs = std::move(it->second); 1882 LargeOffsetGEPMap[ArgVal].append(GEPs.begin(), GEPs.end()); 1883 LargeOffsetGEPMap.erase(II); 1884 } 1885 1886 II->replaceAllUsesWith(ArgVal); 1887 II->eraseFromParent(); 1888 return true; 1889 } 1890 case Intrinsic::cttz: 1891 case Intrinsic::ctlz: 1892 // If counting zeros is expensive, try to avoid it. 1893 return despeculateCountZeros(II, TLI, DL, ModifiedDT); 1894 } 1895 1896 if (TLI) { 1897 SmallVector<Value*, 2> PtrOps; 1898 Type *AccessTy; 1899 if (TLI->getAddrModeArguments(II, PtrOps, AccessTy)) 1900 while (!PtrOps.empty()) { 1901 Value *PtrVal = PtrOps.pop_back_val(); 1902 unsigned AS = PtrVal->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 1903 if (optimizeMemoryInst(II, PtrVal, AccessTy, AS)) 1904 return true; 1905 } 1906 } 1907 } 1908 1909 // From here on out we're working with named functions. 1910 if (!CI->getCalledFunction()) return false; 1911 1912 // Lower all default uses of _chk calls. This is very similar 1913 // to what InstCombineCalls does, but here we are only lowering calls 1914 // to fortified library functions (e.g. __memcpy_chk) that have the default 1915 // "don't know" as the objectsize. Anything else should be left alone. 1916 FortifiedLibCallSimplifier Simplifier(TLInfo, true); 1917 if (Value *V = Simplifier.optimizeCall(CI)) { 1918 CI->replaceAllUsesWith(V); 1919 CI->eraseFromParent(); 1920 return true; 1921 } 1922 1923 return false; 1924 } 1925 1926 /// Look for opportunities to duplicate return instructions to the predecessor 1927 /// to enable tail call optimizations. The case it is currently looking for is: 1928 /// @code 1929 /// bb0: 1930 /// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0() 1931 /// br label %return 1932 /// bb1: 1933 /// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1() 1934 /// br label %return 1935 /// bb2: 1936 /// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2() 1937 /// br label %return 1938 /// return: 1939 /// %retval = phi i32 [ %tmp0, %bb0 ], [ %tmp1, %bb1 ], [ %tmp2, %bb2 ] 1940 /// ret i32 %retval 1941 /// @endcode 1942 /// 1943 /// => 1944 /// 1945 /// @code 1946 /// bb0: 1947 /// %tmp0 = tail call i32 @f0() 1948 /// ret i32 %tmp0 1949 /// bb1: 1950 /// %tmp1 = tail call i32 @f1() 1951 /// ret i32 %tmp1 1952 /// bb2: 1953 /// %tmp2 = tail call i32 @f2() 1954 /// ret i32 %tmp2 1955 /// @endcode 1956 bool CodeGenPrepare::dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(BasicBlock *BB) { 1957 if (!TLI) 1958 return false; 1959 1960 ReturnInst *RetI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator()); 1961 if (!RetI) 1962 return false; 1963 1964 PHINode *PN = nullptr; 1965 BitCastInst *BCI = nullptr; 1966 Value *V = RetI->getReturnValue(); 1967 if (V) { 1968 BCI = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(V); 1969 if (BCI) 1970 V = BCI->getOperand(0); 1971 1972 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V); 1973 if (!PN) 1974 return false; 1975 } 1976 1977 if (PN && PN->getParent() != BB) 1978 return false; 1979 1980 // Make sure there are no instructions between the PHI and return, or that the 1981 // return is the first instruction in the block. 1982 if (PN) { 1983 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin(); 1984 // Skip over debug and the bitcast. 1985 do { ++BI; } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI) || &*BI == BCI); 1986 if (&*BI != RetI) 1987 return false; 1988 } else { 1989 BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB->begin(); 1990 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BI)) ++BI; 1991 if (&*BI != RetI) 1992 return false; 1993 } 1994 1995 /// Only dup the ReturnInst if the CallInst is likely to be emitted as a tail 1996 /// call. 1997 const Function *F = BB->getParent(); 1998 SmallVector<CallInst*, 4> TailCalls; 1999 if (PN) { 2000 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); I != E; ++I) { 2001 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(PN->getIncomingValue(I)); 2002 // Make sure the phi value is indeed produced by the tail call. 2003 if (CI && CI->hasOneUse() && CI->getParent() == PN->getIncomingBlock(I) && 2004 TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI) && 2005 attributesPermitTailCall(F, CI, RetI, *TLI)) 2006 TailCalls.push_back(CI); 2007 } 2008 } else { 2009 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 4> VisitedBBs; 2010 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE; ++PI) { 2011 if (!VisitedBBs.insert(*PI).second) 2012 continue; 2013 2014 BasicBlock::InstListType &InstList = (*PI)->getInstList(); 2015 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI = InstList.rbegin(); 2016 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RE = InstList.rend(); 2017 do { ++RI; } while (RI != RE && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI)); 2018 if (RI == RE) 2019 continue; 2020 2021 CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&*RI); 2022 if (CI && CI->use_empty() && TLI->mayBeEmittedAsTailCall(CI) && 2023 attributesPermitTailCall(F, CI, RetI, *TLI)) 2024 TailCalls.push_back(CI); 2025 } 2026 } 2027 2028 bool Changed = false; 2029 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TailCalls.size(); i != e; ++i) { 2030 CallInst *CI = TailCalls[i]; 2031 CallSite CS(CI); 2032 2033 // Make sure the call instruction is followed by an unconditional branch to 2034 // the return block. 2035 BasicBlock *CallBB = CI->getParent(); 2036 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(CallBB->getTerminator()); 2037 if (!BI || !BI->isUnconditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB) 2038 continue; 2039 2040 // Duplicate the return into CallBB. 2041 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RetI, BB, CallBB); 2042 ModifiedDT = Changed = true; 2043 ++NumRetsDup; 2044 } 2045 2046 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now. 2047 if (Changed && !BB->hasAddressTaken() && pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB)) 2048 BB->eraseFromParent(); 2049 2050 return Changed; 2051 } 2052 2053 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 2054 // Memory Optimization 2055 //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// 2056 2057 namespace { 2058 2059 /// This is an extended version of TargetLowering::AddrMode 2060 /// which holds actual Value*'s for register values. 2061 struct ExtAddrMode : public TargetLowering::AddrMode { 2062 Value *BaseReg = nullptr; 2063 Value *ScaledReg = nullptr; 2064 Value *OriginalValue = nullptr; 2065 2066 enum FieldName { 2067 NoField = 0x00, 2068 BaseRegField = 0x01, 2069 BaseGVField = 0x02, 2070 BaseOffsField = 0x04, 2071 ScaledRegField = 0x08, 2072 ScaleField = 0x10, 2073 MultipleFields = 0xff 2074 }; 2075 2076 ExtAddrMode() = default; 2077 2078 void print(raw_ostream &OS) const; 2079 void dump() const; 2080 2081 FieldName compare(const ExtAddrMode &other) { 2082 // First check that the types are the same on each field, as differing types 2083 // is something we can't cope with later on. 2084 if (BaseReg && other.BaseReg && 2085 BaseReg->getType() != other.BaseReg->getType()) 2086 return MultipleFields; 2087 if (BaseGV && other.BaseGV && 2088 BaseGV->getType() != other.BaseGV->getType()) 2089 return MultipleFields; 2090 if (ScaledReg && other.ScaledReg && 2091 ScaledReg->getType() != other.ScaledReg->getType()) 2092 return MultipleFields; 2093 2094 // Check each field to see if it differs. 2095 unsigned Result = NoField; 2096 if (BaseReg != other.BaseReg) 2097 Result |= BaseRegField; 2098 if (BaseGV != other.BaseGV) 2099 Result |= BaseGVField; 2100 if (BaseOffs != other.BaseOffs) 2101 Result |= BaseOffsField; 2102 if (ScaledReg != other.ScaledReg) 2103 Result |= ScaledRegField; 2104 // Don't count 0 as being a different scale, because that actually means 2105 // unscaled (which will already be counted by having no ScaledReg). 2106 if (Scale && other.Scale && Scale != other.Scale) 2107 Result |= ScaleField; 2108 2109 if (countPopulation(Result) > 1) 2110 return MultipleFields; 2111 else 2112 return static_cast<FieldName>(Result); 2113 } 2114 2115 // An AddrMode is trivial if it involves no calculation i.e. it is just a base 2116 // with no offset. 2117 bool isTrivial() { 2118 // An AddrMode is (BaseGV + BaseReg + BaseOffs + ScaleReg * Scale) so it is 2119 // trivial if at most one of these terms is nonzero, except that BaseGV and 2120 // BaseReg both being zero actually means a null pointer value, which we 2121 // consider to be 'non-zero' here. 2122 return !BaseOffs && !Scale && !(BaseGV && BaseReg); 2123 } 2124 2125 Value *GetFieldAsValue(FieldName Field, Type *IntPtrTy) { 2126 switch (Field) { 2127 default: 2128 return nullptr; 2129 case BaseRegField: 2130 return BaseReg; 2131 case BaseGVField: 2132 return BaseGV; 2133 case ScaledRegField: 2134 return ScaledReg; 2135 case BaseOffsField: 2136 return ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, BaseOffs); 2137 } 2138 } 2139 2140 void SetCombinedField(FieldName Field, Value *V, 2141 const SmallVectorImpl<ExtAddrMode> &AddrModes) { 2142 switch (Field) { 2143 default: 2144 llvm_unreachable("Unhandled fields are expected to be rejected earlier"); 2145 break; 2146 case ExtAddrMode::BaseRegField: 2147 BaseReg = V; 2148 break; 2149 case ExtAddrMode::BaseGVField: 2150 // A combined BaseGV is an Instruction, not a GlobalValue, so it goes 2151 // in the BaseReg field. 2152 assert(BaseReg == nullptr); 2153 BaseReg = V; 2154 BaseGV = nullptr; 2155 break; 2156 case ExtAddrMode::ScaledRegField: 2157 ScaledReg = V; 2158 // If we have a mix of scaled and unscaled addrmodes then we want scale 2159 // to be the scale and not zero. 2160 if (!Scale) 2161 for (const ExtAddrMode &AM : AddrModes) 2162 if (AM.Scale) { 2163 Scale = AM.Scale; 2164 break; 2165 } 2166 break; 2167 case ExtAddrMode::BaseOffsField: 2168 // The offset is no longer a constant, so it goes in ScaledReg with a 2169 // scale of 1. 2170 assert(ScaledReg == nullptr); 2171 ScaledReg = V; 2172 Scale = 1; 2173 BaseOffs = 0; 2174 break; 2175 } 2176 } 2177 }; 2178 2179 } // end anonymous namespace 2180 2181 #ifndef NDEBUG 2182 static inline raw_ostream &operator<<(raw_ostream &OS, const ExtAddrMode &AM) { 2183 AM.print(OS); 2184 return OS; 2185 } 2186 #endif 2187 2188 #if !defined(NDEBUG) || defined(LLVM_ENABLE_DUMP) 2189 void ExtAddrMode::print(raw_ostream &OS) const { 2190 bool NeedPlus = false; 2191 OS << "["; 2192 if (BaseGV) { 2193 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "") 2194 << "GV:"; 2195 BaseGV->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false); 2196 NeedPlus = true; 2197 } 2198 2199 if (BaseOffs) { 2200 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "") 2201 << BaseOffs; 2202 NeedPlus = true; 2203 } 2204 2205 if (BaseReg) { 2206 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "") 2207 << "Base:"; 2208 BaseReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false); 2209 NeedPlus = true; 2210 } 2211 if (Scale) { 2212 OS << (NeedPlus ? " + " : "") 2213 << Scale << "*"; 2214 ScaledReg->printAsOperand(OS, /*PrintType=*/false); 2215 } 2216 2217 OS << ']'; 2218 } 2219 2220 LLVM_DUMP_METHOD void ExtAddrMode::dump() const { 2221 print(dbgs()); 2222 dbgs() << '\n'; 2223 } 2224 #endif 2225 2226 namespace { 2227 2228 /// This class provides transaction based operation on the IR. 2229 /// Every change made through this class is recorded in the internal state and 2230 /// can be undone (rollback) until commit is called. 2231 class TypePromotionTransaction { 2232 /// This represents the common interface of the individual transaction. 2233 /// Each class implements the logic for doing one specific modification on 2234 /// the IR via the TypePromotionTransaction. 2235 class TypePromotionAction { 2236 protected: 2237 /// The Instruction modified. 2238 Instruction *Inst; 2239 2240 public: 2241 /// Constructor of the action. 2242 /// The constructor performs the related action on the IR. 2243 TypePromotionAction(Instruction *Inst) : Inst(Inst) {} 2244 2245 virtual ~TypePromotionAction() = default; 2246 2247 /// Undo the modification done by this action. 2248 /// When this method is called, the IR must be in the same state as it was 2249 /// before this action was applied. 2250 /// \pre Undoing the action works if and only if the IR is in the exact same 2251 /// state as it was directly after this action was applied. 2252 virtual void undo() = 0; 2253 2254 /// Advocate every change made by this action. 2255 /// When the results on the IR of the action are to be kept, it is important 2256 /// to call this function, otherwise hidden information may be kept forever. 2257 virtual void commit() { 2258 // Nothing to be done, this action is not doing anything. 2259 } 2260 }; 2261 2262 /// Utility to remember the position of an instruction. 2263 class InsertionHandler { 2264 /// Position of an instruction. 2265 /// Either an instruction: 2266 /// - Is the first in a basic block: BB is used. 2267 /// - Has a previous instruction: PrevInst is used. 2268 union { 2269 Instruction *PrevInst; 2270 BasicBlock *BB; 2271 } Point; 2272 2273 /// Remember whether or not the instruction had a previous instruction. 2274 bool HasPrevInstruction; 2275 2276 public: 2277 /// Record the position of \p Inst. 2278 InsertionHandler(Instruction *Inst) { 2279 BasicBlock::iterator It = Inst->getIterator(); 2280 HasPrevInstruction = (It != (Inst->getParent()->begin())); 2281 if (HasPrevInstruction) 2282 Point.PrevInst = &*--It; 2283 else 2284 Point.BB = Inst->getParent(); 2285 } 2286 2287 /// Insert \p Inst at the recorded position. 2288 void insert(Instruction *Inst) { 2289 if (HasPrevInstruction) { 2290 if (Inst->getParent()) 2291 Inst->removeFromParent(); 2292 Inst->insertAfter(Point.PrevInst); 2293 } else { 2294 Instruction *Position = &*Point.BB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 2295 if (Inst->getParent()) 2296 Inst->moveBefore(Position); 2297 else 2298 Inst->insertBefore(Position); 2299 } 2300 } 2301 }; 2302 2303 /// Move an instruction before another. 2304 class InstructionMoveBefore : public TypePromotionAction { 2305 /// Original position of the instruction. 2306 InsertionHandler Position; 2307 2308 public: 2309 /// Move \p Inst before \p Before. 2310 InstructionMoveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before) 2311 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Position(Inst) { 2312 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: move: " << *Inst << "\nbefore: " << *Before 2313 << "\n"); 2314 Inst->moveBefore(Before); 2315 } 2316 2317 /// Move the instruction back to its original position. 2318 void undo() override { 2319 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: moveBefore: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2320 Position.insert(Inst); 2321 } 2322 }; 2323 2324 /// Set the operand of an instruction with a new value. 2325 class OperandSetter : public TypePromotionAction { 2326 /// Original operand of the instruction. 2327 Value *Origin; 2328 2329 /// Index of the modified instruction. 2330 unsigned Idx; 2331 2332 public: 2333 /// Set \p Idx operand of \p Inst with \p NewVal. 2334 OperandSetter(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal) 2335 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Idx(Idx) { 2336 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: setOperand: " << Idx << "\n" 2337 << "for:" << *Inst << "\n" 2338 << "with:" << *NewVal << "\n"); 2339 Origin = Inst->getOperand(Idx); 2340 Inst->setOperand(Idx, NewVal); 2341 } 2342 2343 /// Restore the original value of the instruction. 2344 void undo() override { 2345 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: setOperand:" << Idx << "\n" 2346 << "for: " << *Inst << "\n" 2347 << "with: " << *Origin << "\n"); 2348 Inst->setOperand(Idx, Origin); 2349 } 2350 }; 2351 2352 /// Hide the operands of an instruction. 2353 /// Do as if this instruction was not using any of its operands. 2354 class OperandsHider : public TypePromotionAction { 2355 /// The list of original operands. 2356 SmallVector<Value *, 4> OriginalValues; 2357 2358 public: 2359 /// Remove \p Inst from the uses of the operands of \p Inst. 2360 OperandsHider(Instruction *Inst) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) { 2361 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2362 unsigned NumOpnds = Inst->getNumOperands(); 2363 OriginalValues.reserve(NumOpnds); 2364 for (unsigned It = 0; It < NumOpnds; ++It) { 2365 // Save the current operand. 2366 Value *Val = Inst->getOperand(It); 2367 OriginalValues.push_back(Val); 2368 // Set a dummy one. 2369 // We could use OperandSetter here, but that would imply an overhead 2370 // that we are not willing to pay. 2371 Inst->setOperand(It, UndefValue::get(Val->getType())); 2372 } 2373 } 2374 2375 /// Restore the original list of uses. 2376 void undo() override { 2377 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: OperandsHider: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2378 for (unsigned It = 0, EndIt = OriginalValues.size(); It != EndIt; ++It) 2379 Inst->setOperand(It, OriginalValues[It]); 2380 } 2381 }; 2382 2383 /// Build a truncate instruction. 2384 class TruncBuilder : public TypePromotionAction { 2385 Value *Val; 2386 2387 public: 2388 /// Build a truncate instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty 2389 /// result. 2390 /// trunc Opnd to Ty. 2391 TruncBuilder(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty) : TypePromotionAction(Opnd) { 2392 IRBuilder<> Builder(Opnd); 2393 Val = Builder.CreateTrunc(Opnd, Ty, "promoted"); 2394 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2395 } 2396 2397 /// Get the built value. 2398 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; } 2399 2400 /// Remove the built instruction. 2401 void undo() override { 2402 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: TruncBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2403 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val)) 2404 IVal->eraseFromParent(); 2405 } 2406 }; 2407 2408 /// Build a sign extension instruction. 2409 class SExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction { 2410 Value *Val; 2411 2412 public: 2413 /// Build a sign extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty 2414 /// result. 2415 /// sext Opnd to Ty. 2416 SExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) 2417 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) { 2418 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt); 2419 Val = Builder.CreateSExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted"); 2420 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2421 } 2422 2423 /// Get the built value. 2424 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; } 2425 2426 /// Remove the built instruction. 2427 void undo() override { 2428 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: SExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2429 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val)) 2430 IVal->eraseFromParent(); 2431 } 2432 }; 2433 2434 /// Build a zero extension instruction. 2435 class ZExtBuilder : public TypePromotionAction { 2436 Value *Val; 2437 2438 public: 2439 /// Build a zero extension instruction of \p Opnd producing a \p Ty 2440 /// result. 2441 /// zext Opnd to Ty. 2442 ZExtBuilder(Instruction *InsertPt, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) 2443 : TypePromotionAction(InsertPt) { 2444 IRBuilder<> Builder(InsertPt); 2445 Val = Builder.CreateZExt(Opnd, Ty, "promoted"); 2446 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2447 } 2448 2449 /// Get the built value. 2450 Value *getBuiltValue() { return Val; } 2451 2452 /// Remove the built instruction. 2453 void undo() override { 2454 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: ZExtBuilder: " << *Val << "\n"); 2455 if (Instruction *IVal = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val)) 2456 IVal->eraseFromParent(); 2457 } 2458 }; 2459 2460 /// Mutate an instruction to another type. 2461 class TypeMutator : public TypePromotionAction { 2462 /// Record the original type. 2463 Type *OrigTy; 2464 2465 public: 2466 /// Mutate the type of \p Inst into \p NewTy. 2467 TypeMutator(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy) 2468 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), OrigTy(Inst->getType()) { 2469 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *NewTy 2470 << "\n"); 2471 Inst->mutateType(NewTy); 2472 } 2473 2474 /// Mutate the instruction back to its original type. 2475 void undo() override { 2476 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: MutateType: " << *Inst << " with " << *OrigTy 2477 << "\n"); 2478 Inst->mutateType(OrigTy); 2479 } 2480 }; 2481 2482 /// Replace the uses of an instruction by another instruction. 2483 class UsesReplacer : public TypePromotionAction { 2484 /// Helper structure to keep track of the replaced uses. 2485 struct InstructionAndIdx { 2486 /// The instruction using the instruction. 2487 Instruction *Inst; 2488 2489 /// The index where this instruction is used for Inst. 2490 unsigned Idx; 2491 2492 InstructionAndIdx(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx) 2493 : Inst(Inst), Idx(Idx) {} 2494 }; 2495 2496 /// Keep track of the original uses (pair Instruction, Index). 2497 SmallVector<InstructionAndIdx, 4> OriginalUses; 2498 /// Keep track of the debug users. 2499 SmallVector<DbgValueInst *, 1> DbgValues; 2500 2501 using use_iterator = SmallVectorImpl<InstructionAndIdx>::iterator; 2502 2503 public: 2504 /// Replace all the use of \p Inst by \p New. 2505 UsesReplacer(Instruction *Inst, Value *New) : TypePromotionAction(Inst) { 2506 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << " with " << *New 2507 << "\n"); 2508 // Record the original uses. 2509 for (Use &U : Inst->uses()) { 2510 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser()); 2511 OriginalUses.push_back(InstructionAndIdx(UserI, U.getOperandNo())); 2512 } 2513 // Record the debug uses separately. They are not in the instruction's 2514 // use list, but they are replaced by RAUW. 2515 findDbgValues(DbgValues, Inst); 2516 2517 // Now, we can replace the uses. 2518 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(New); 2519 } 2520 2521 /// Reassign the original uses of Inst to Inst. 2522 void undo() override { 2523 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: UsersReplacer: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2524 for (use_iterator UseIt = OriginalUses.begin(), 2525 EndIt = OriginalUses.end(); 2526 UseIt != EndIt; ++UseIt) { 2527 UseIt->Inst->setOperand(UseIt->Idx, Inst); 2528 } 2529 // RAUW has replaced all original uses with references to the new value, 2530 // including the debug uses. Since we are undoing the replacements, 2531 // the original debug uses must also be reinstated to maintain the 2532 // correctness and utility of debug value instructions. 2533 for (auto *DVI: DbgValues) { 2534 LLVMContext &Ctx = Inst->getType()->getContext(); 2535 auto *MV = MetadataAsValue::get(Ctx, ValueAsMetadata::get(Inst)); 2536 DVI->setOperand(0, MV); 2537 } 2538 } 2539 }; 2540 2541 /// Remove an instruction from the IR. 2542 class InstructionRemover : public TypePromotionAction { 2543 /// Original position of the instruction. 2544 InsertionHandler Inserter; 2545 2546 /// Helper structure to hide all the link to the instruction. In other 2547 /// words, this helps to do as if the instruction was removed. 2548 OperandsHider Hider; 2549 2550 /// Keep track of the uses replaced, if any. 2551 UsesReplacer *Replacer = nullptr; 2552 2553 /// Keep track of instructions removed. 2554 SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts; 2555 2556 public: 2557 /// Remove all reference of \p Inst and optionally replace all its 2558 /// uses with New. 2559 /// \p RemovedInsts Keep track of the instructions removed by this Action. 2560 /// \pre If !Inst->use_empty(), then New != nullptr 2561 InstructionRemover(Instruction *Inst, SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts, 2562 Value *New = nullptr) 2563 : TypePromotionAction(Inst), Inserter(Inst), Hider(Inst), 2564 RemovedInsts(RemovedInsts) { 2565 if (New) 2566 Replacer = new UsesReplacer(Inst, New); 2567 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Do: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2568 RemovedInsts.insert(Inst); 2569 /// The instructions removed here will be freed after completing 2570 /// optimizeBlock() for all blocks as we need to keep track of the 2571 /// removed instructions during promotion. 2572 Inst->removeFromParent(); 2573 } 2574 2575 ~InstructionRemover() override { delete Replacer; } 2576 2577 /// Resurrect the instruction and reassign it to the proper uses if 2578 /// new value was provided when build this action. 2579 void undo() override { 2580 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Undo: InstructionRemover: " << *Inst << "\n"); 2581 Inserter.insert(Inst); 2582 if (Replacer) 2583 Replacer->undo(); 2584 Hider.undo(); 2585 RemovedInsts.erase(Inst); 2586 } 2587 }; 2588 2589 public: 2590 /// Restoration point. 2591 /// The restoration point is a pointer to an action instead of an iterator 2592 /// because the iterator may be invalidated but not the pointer. 2593 using ConstRestorationPt = const TypePromotionAction *; 2594 2595 TypePromotionTransaction(SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts) 2596 : RemovedInsts(RemovedInsts) {} 2597 2598 /// Advocate every changes made in that transaction. 2599 void commit(); 2600 2601 /// Undo all the changes made after the given point. 2602 void rollback(ConstRestorationPt Point); 2603 2604 /// Get the current restoration point. 2605 ConstRestorationPt getRestorationPoint() const; 2606 2607 /// \name API for IR modification with state keeping to support rollback. 2608 /// @{ 2609 /// Same as Instruction::setOperand. 2610 void setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, Value *NewVal); 2611 2612 /// Same as Instruction::eraseFromParent. 2613 void eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst, Value *NewVal = nullptr); 2614 2615 /// Same as Value::replaceAllUsesWith. 2616 void replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst, Value *New); 2617 2618 /// Same as Value::mutateType. 2619 void mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy); 2620 2621 /// Same as IRBuilder::createTrunc. 2622 Value *createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd, Type *Ty); 2623 2624 /// Same as IRBuilder::createSExt. 2625 Value *createSExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty); 2626 2627 /// Same as IRBuilder::createZExt. 2628 Value *createZExt(Instruction *Inst, Value *Opnd, Type *Ty); 2629 2630 /// Same as Instruction::moveBefore. 2631 void moveBefore(Instruction *Inst, Instruction *Before); 2632 /// @} 2633 2634 private: 2635 /// The ordered list of actions made so far. 2636 SmallVector<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>, 16> Actions; 2637 2638 using CommitPt = SmallVectorImpl<std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction>>::iterator; 2639 2640 SetOfInstrs &RemovedInsts; 2641 }; 2642 2643 } // end anonymous namespace 2644 2645 void TypePromotionTransaction::setOperand(Instruction *Inst, unsigned Idx, 2646 Value *NewVal) { 2647 Actions.push_back(llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::OperandSetter>( 2648 Inst, Idx, NewVal)); 2649 } 2650 2651 void TypePromotionTransaction::eraseInstruction(Instruction *Inst, 2652 Value *NewVal) { 2653 Actions.push_back( 2654 llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionRemover>( 2655 Inst, RemovedInsts, NewVal)); 2656 } 2657 2658 void TypePromotionTransaction::replaceAllUsesWith(Instruction *Inst, 2659 Value *New) { 2660 Actions.push_back( 2661 llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::UsesReplacer>(Inst, New)); 2662 } 2663 2664 void TypePromotionTransaction::mutateType(Instruction *Inst, Type *NewTy) { 2665 Actions.push_back( 2666 llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::TypeMutator>(Inst, NewTy)); 2667 } 2668 2669 Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createTrunc(Instruction *Opnd, 2670 Type *Ty) { 2671 std::unique_ptr<TruncBuilder> Ptr(new TruncBuilder(Opnd, Ty)); 2672 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue(); 2673 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr)); 2674 return Val; 2675 } 2676 2677 Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createSExt(Instruction *Inst, 2678 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) { 2679 std::unique_ptr<SExtBuilder> Ptr(new SExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty)); 2680 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue(); 2681 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr)); 2682 return Val; 2683 } 2684 2685 Value *TypePromotionTransaction::createZExt(Instruction *Inst, 2686 Value *Opnd, Type *Ty) { 2687 std::unique_ptr<ZExtBuilder> Ptr(new ZExtBuilder(Inst, Opnd, Ty)); 2688 Value *Val = Ptr->getBuiltValue(); 2689 Actions.push_back(std::move(Ptr)); 2690 return Val; 2691 } 2692 2693 void TypePromotionTransaction::moveBefore(Instruction *Inst, 2694 Instruction *Before) { 2695 Actions.push_back( 2696 llvm::make_unique<TypePromotionTransaction::InstructionMoveBefore>( 2697 Inst, Before)); 2698 } 2699 2700 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt 2701 TypePromotionTransaction::getRestorationPoint() const { 2702 return !Actions.empty() ? Actions.back().get() : nullptr; 2703 } 2704 2705 void TypePromotionTransaction::commit() { 2706 for (CommitPt It = Actions.begin(), EndIt = Actions.end(); It != EndIt; 2707 ++It) 2708 (*It)->commit(); 2709 Actions.clear(); 2710 } 2711 2712 void TypePromotionTransaction::rollback( 2713 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt Point) { 2714 while (!Actions.empty() && Point != Actions.back().get()) { 2715 std::unique_ptr<TypePromotionAction> Curr = Actions.pop_back_val(); 2716 Curr->undo(); 2717 } 2718 } 2719 2720 namespace { 2721 2722 /// A helper class for matching addressing modes. 2723 /// 2724 /// This encapsulates the logic for matching the target-legal addressing modes. 2725 class AddressingModeMatcher { 2726 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction*> &AddrModeInsts; 2727 const TargetLowering &TLI; 2728 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI; 2729 const DataLayout &DL; 2730 2731 /// AccessTy/MemoryInst - This is the type for the access (e.g. double) and 2732 /// the memory instruction that we're computing this address for. 2733 Type *AccessTy; 2734 unsigned AddrSpace; 2735 Instruction *MemoryInst; 2736 2737 /// This is the addressing mode that we're building up. This is 2738 /// part of the return value of this addressing mode matching stuff. 2739 ExtAddrMode &AddrMode; 2740 2741 /// The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare optimizations. 2742 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts; 2743 2744 /// A map from the instructions to their type before promotion. 2745 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts; 2746 2747 /// The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered. 2748 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT; 2749 2750 // A GEP which has too large offset to be folded into the addressing mode. 2751 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> &LargeOffsetGEP; 2752 2753 /// This is set to true when we should not do profitability checks. 2754 /// When true, IsProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode always returns true. 2755 bool IgnoreProfitability; 2756 2757 AddressingModeMatcher( 2758 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &AMI, const TargetLowering &TLI, 2759 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI, Type *AT, unsigned AS, Instruction *MI, 2760 ExtAddrMode &AM, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts, 2761 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 2762 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> &LargeOffsetGEP) 2763 : AddrModeInsts(AMI), TLI(TLI), TRI(TRI), 2764 DL(MI->getModule()->getDataLayout()), AccessTy(AT), AddrSpace(AS), 2765 MemoryInst(MI), AddrMode(AM), InsertedInsts(InsertedInsts), 2766 PromotedInsts(PromotedInsts), TPT(TPT), LargeOffsetGEP(LargeOffsetGEP) { 2767 IgnoreProfitability = false; 2768 } 2769 2770 public: 2771 /// Find the maximal addressing mode that a load/store of V can fold, 2772 /// give an access type of AccessTy. This returns a list of involved 2773 /// instructions in AddrModeInsts. 2774 /// \p InsertedInsts The instructions inserted by other CodeGenPrepare 2775 /// optimizations. 2776 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 2777 /// \p The ongoing transaction where every action should be registered. 2778 static ExtAddrMode 2779 Match(Value *V, Type *AccessTy, unsigned AS, Instruction *MemoryInst, 2780 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &AddrModeInsts, 2781 const TargetLowering &TLI, const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI, 2782 const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts, InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 2783 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 2784 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> &LargeOffsetGEP) { 2785 ExtAddrMode Result; 2786 2787 bool Success = AddressingModeMatcher(AddrModeInsts, TLI, TRI, AccessTy, AS, 2788 MemoryInst, Result, InsertedInsts, 2789 PromotedInsts, TPT, LargeOffsetGEP) 2790 .matchAddr(V, 0); 2791 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?"); 2792 return Result; 2793 } 2794 2795 private: 2796 bool matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale, unsigned Depth); 2797 bool matchAddr(Value *Addr, unsigned Depth); 2798 bool matchOperationAddr(User *AddrInst, unsigned Opcode, unsigned Depth, 2799 bool *MovedAway = nullptr); 2800 bool isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I, 2801 ExtAddrMode &AMBefore, 2802 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter); 2803 bool valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val, Value *KnownLive1, Value *KnownLive2); 2804 bool isPromotionProfitable(unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost, 2805 Value *PromotedOperand) const; 2806 }; 2807 2808 class PhiNodeSet; 2809 2810 /// An iterator for PhiNodeSet. 2811 class PhiNodeSetIterator { 2812 PhiNodeSet * const Set; 2813 size_t CurrentIndex = 0; 2814 2815 public: 2816 /// The constructor. Start should point to either a valid element, or be equal 2817 /// to the size of the underlying SmallVector of the PhiNodeSet. 2818 PhiNodeSetIterator(PhiNodeSet * const Set, size_t Start); 2819 PHINode * operator*() const; 2820 PhiNodeSetIterator& operator++(); 2821 bool operator==(const PhiNodeSetIterator &RHS) const; 2822 bool operator!=(const PhiNodeSetIterator &RHS) const; 2823 }; 2824 2825 /// Keeps a set of PHINodes. 2826 /// 2827 /// This is a minimal set implementation for a specific use case: 2828 /// It is very fast when there are very few elements, but also provides good 2829 /// performance when there are many. It is similar to SmallPtrSet, but also 2830 /// provides iteration by insertion order, which is deterministic and stable 2831 /// across runs. It is also similar to SmallSetVector, but provides removing 2832 /// elements in O(1) time. This is achieved by not actually removing the element 2833 /// from the underlying vector, so comes at the cost of using more memory, but 2834 /// that is fine, since PhiNodeSets are used as short lived objects. 2835 class PhiNodeSet { 2836 friend class PhiNodeSetIterator; 2837 2838 using MapType = SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, size_t, 32>; 2839 using iterator = PhiNodeSetIterator; 2840 2841 /// Keeps the elements in the order of their insertion in the underlying 2842 /// vector. To achieve constant time removal, it never deletes any element. 2843 SmallVector<PHINode *, 32> NodeList; 2844 2845 /// Keeps the elements in the underlying set implementation. This (and not the 2846 /// NodeList defined above) is the source of truth on whether an element 2847 /// is actually in the collection. 2848 MapType NodeMap; 2849 2850 /// Points to the first valid (not deleted) element when the set is not empty 2851 /// and the value is not zero. Equals to the size of the underlying vector 2852 /// when the set is empty. When the value is 0, as in the beginning, the 2853 /// first element may or may not be valid. 2854 size_t FirstValidElement = 0; 2855 2856 public: 2857 /// Inserts a new element to the collection. 2858 /// \returns true if the element is actually added, i.e. was not in the 2859 /// collection before the operation. 2860 bool insert(PHINode *Ptr) { 2861 if (NodeMap.insert(std::make_pair(Ptr, NodeList.size())).second) { 2862 NodeList.push_back(Ptr); 2863 return true; 2864 } 2865 return false; 2866 } 2867 2868 /// Removes the element from the collection. 2869 /// \returns whether the element is actually removed, i.e. was in the 2870 /// collection before the operation. 2871 bool erase(PHINode *Ptr) { 2872 auto it = NodeMap.find(Ptr); 2873 if (it != NodeMap.end()) { 2874 NodeMap.erase(Ptr); 2875 SkipRemovedElements(FirstValidElement); 2876 return true; 2877 } 2878 return false; 2879 } 2880 2881 /// Removes all elements and clears the collection. 2882 void clear() { 2883 NodeMap.clear(); 2884 NodeList.clear(); 2885 FirstValidElement = 0; 2886 } 2887 2888 /// \returns an iterator that will iterate the elements in the order of 2889 /// insertion. 2890 iterator begin() { 2891 if (FirstValidElement == 0) 2892 SkipRemovedElements(FirstValidElement); 2893 return PhiNodeSetIterator(this, FirstValidElement); 2894 } 2895 2896 /// \returns an iterator that points to the end of the collection. 2897 iterator end() { return PhiNodeSetIterator(this, NodeList.size()); } 2898 2899 /// Returns the number of elements in the collection. 2900 size_t size() const { 2901 return NodeMap.size(); 2902 } 2903 2904 /// \returns 1 if the given element is in the collection, and 0 if otherwise. 2905 size_t count(PHINode *Ptr) const { 2906 return NodeMap.count(Ptr); 2907 } 2908 2909 private: 2910 /// Updates the CurrentIndex so that it will point to a valid element. 2911 /// 2912 /// If the element of NodeList at CurrentIndex is valid, it does not 2913 /// change it. If there are no more valid elements, it updates CurrentIndex 2914 /// to point to the end of the NodeList. 2915 void SkipRemovedElements(size_t &CurrentIndex) { 2916 while (CurrentIndex < NodeList.size()) { 2917 auto it = NodeMap.find(NodeList[CurrentIndex]); 2918 // If the element has been deleted and added again later, NodeMap will 2919 // point to a different index, so CurrentIndex will still be invalid. 2920 if (it != NodeMap.end() && it->second == CurrentIndex) 2921 break; 2922 ++CurrentIndex; 2923 } 2924 } 2925 }; 2926 2927 PhiNodeSetIterator::PhiNodeSetIterator(PhiNodeSet *const Set, size_t Start) 2928 : Set(Set), CurrentIndex(Start) {} 2929 2930 PHINode * PhiNodeSetIterator::operator*() const { 2931 assert(CurrentIndex < Set->NodeList.size() && 2932 "PhiNodeSet access out of range"); 2933 return Set->NodeList[CurrentIndex]; 2934 } 2935 2936 PhiNodeSetIterator& PhiNodeSetIterator::operator++() { 2937 assert(CurrentIndex < Set->NodeList.size() && 2938 "PhiNodeSet access out of range"); 2939 ++CurrentIndex; 2940 Set->SkipRemovedElements(CurrentIndex); 2941 return *this; 2942 } 2943 2944 bool PhiNodeSetIterator::operator==(const PhiNodeSetIterator &RHS) const { 2945 return CurrentIndex == RHS.CurrentIndex; 2946 } 2947 2948 bool PhiNodeSetIterator::operator!=(const PhiNodeSetIterator &RHS) const { 2949 return !((*this) == RHS); 2950 } 2951 2952 /// Keep track of simplification of Phi nodes. 2953 /// Accept the set of all phi nodes and erase phi node from this set 2954 /// if it is simplified. 2955 class SimplificationTracker { 2956 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> Storage; 2957 const SimplifyQuery &SQ; 2958 // Tracks newly created Phi nodes. The elements are iterated by insertion 2959 // order. 2960 PhiNodeSet AllPhiNodes; 2961 // Tracks newly created Select nodes. 2962 SmallPtrSet<SelectInst *, 32> AllSelectNodes; 2963 2964 public: 2965 SimplificationTracker(const SimplifyQuery &sq) 2966 : SQ(sq) {} 2967 2968 Value *Get(Value *V) { 2969 do { 2970 auto SV = Storage.find(V); 2971 if (SV == Storage.end()) 2972 return V; 2973 V = SV->second; 2974 } while (true); 2975 } 2976 2977 Value *Simplify(Value *Val) { 2978 SmallVector<Value *, 32> WorkList; 2979 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 32> Visited; 2980 WorkList.push_back(Val); 2981 while (!WorkList.empty()) { 2982 auto P = WorkList.pop_back_val(); 2983 if (!Visited.insert(P).second) 2984 continue; 2985 if (auto *PI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(P)) 2986 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(cast<Instruction>(PI), SQ)) { 2987 for (auto *U : PI->users()) 2988 WorkList.push_back(cast<Value>(U)); 2989 Put(PI, V); 2990 PI->replaceAllUsesWith(V); 2991 if (auto *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(PI)) 2992 AllPhiNodes.erase(PHI); 2993 if (auto *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(PI)) 2994 AllSelectNodes.erase(Select); 2995 PI->eraseFromParent(); 2996 } 2997 } 2998 return Get(Val); 2999 } 3000 3001 void Put(Value *From, Value *To) { 3002 Storage.insert({ From, To }); 3003 } 3004 3005 void ReplacePhi(PHINode *From, PHINode *To) { 3006 Value* OldReplacement = Get(From); 3007 while (OldReplacement != From) { 3008 From = To; 3009 To = dyn_cast<PHINode>(OldReplacement); 3010 OldReplacement = Get(From); 3011 } 3012 assert(Get(To) == To && "Replacement PHI node is already replaced."); 3013 Put(From, To); 3014 From->replaceAllUsesWith(To); 3015 AllPhiNodes.erase(From); 3016 From->eraseFromParent(); 3017 } 3018 3019 PhiNodeSet& newPhiNodes() { return AllPhiNodes; } 3020 3021 void insertNewPhi(PHINode *PN) { AllPhiNodes.insert(PN); } 3022 3023 void insertNewSelect(SelectInst *SI) { AllSelectNodes.insert(SI); } 3024 3025 unsigned countNewPhiNodes() const { return AllPhiNodes.size(); } 3026 3027 unsigned countNewSelectNodes() const { return AllSelectNodes.size(); } 3028 3029 void destroyNewNodes(Type *CommonType) { 3030 // For safe erasing, replace the uses with dummy value first. 3031 auto Dummy = UndefValue::get(CommonType); 3032 for (auto I : AllPhiNodes) { 3033 I->replaceAllUsesWith(Dummy); 3034 I->eraseFromParent(); 3035 } 3036 AllPhiNodes.clear(); 3037 for (auto I : AllSelectNodes) { 3038 I->replaceAllUsesWith(Dummy); 3039 I->eraseFromParent(); 3040 } 3041 AllSelectNodes.clear(); 3042 } 3043 }; 3044 3045 /// A helper class for combining addressing modes. 3046 class AddressingModeCombiner { 3047 typedef DenseMap<Value *, Value *> FoldAddrToValueMapping; 3048 typedef std::pair<PHINode *, PHINode *> PHIPair; 3049 3050 private: 3051 /// The addressing modes we've collected. 3052 SmallVector<ExtAddrMode, 16> AddrModes; 3053 3054 /// The field in which the AddrModes differ, when we have more than one. 3055 ExtAddrMode::FieldName DifferentField = ExtAddrMode::NoField; 3056 3057 /// Are the AddrModes that we have all just equal to their original values? 3058 bool AllAddrModesTrivial = true; 3059 3060 /// Common Type for all different fields in addressing modes. 3061 Type *CommonType; 3062 3063 /// SimplifyQuery for simplifyInstruction utility. 3064 const SimplifyQuery &SQ; 3065 3066 /// Original Address. 3067 Value *Original; 3068 3069 public: 3070 AddressingModeCombiner(const SimplifyQuery &_SQ, Value *OriginalValue) 3071 : CommonType(nullptr), SQ(_SQ), Original(OriginalValue) {} 3072 3073 /// Get the combined AddrMode 3074 const ExtAddrMode &getAddrMode() const { 3075 return AddrModes[0]; 3076 } 3077 3078 /// Add a new AddrMode if it's compatible with the AddrModes we already 3079 /// have. 3080 /// \return True iff we succeeded in doing so. 3081 bool addNewAddrMode(ExtAddrMode &NewAddrMode) { 3082 // Take note of if we have any non-trivial AddrModes, as we need to detect 3083 // when all AddrModes are trivial as then we would introduce a phi or select 3084 // which just duplicates what's already there. 3085 AllAddrModesTrivial = AllAddrModesTrivial && NewAddrMode.isTrivial(); 3086 3087 // If this is the first addrmode then everything is fine. 3088 if (AddrModes.empty()) { 3089 AddrModes.emplace_back(NewAddrMode); 3090 return true; 3091 } 3092 3093 // Figure out how different this is from the other address modes, which we 3094 // can do just by comparing against the first one given that we only care 3095 // about the cumulative difference. 3096 ExtAddrMode::FieldName ThisDifferentField = 3097 AddrModes[0].compare(NewAddrMode); 3098 if (DifferentField == ExtAddrMode::NoField) 3099 DifferentField = ThisDifferentField; 3100 else if (DifferentField != ThisDifferentField) 3101 DifferentField = ExtAddrMode::MultipleFields; 3102 3103 // If NewAddrMode differs in more than one dimension we cannot handle it. 3104 bool CanHandle = DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::MultipleFields; 3105 3106 // If Scale Field is different then we reject. 3107 CanHandle = CanHandle && DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::ScaleField; 3108 3109 // We also must reject the case when base offset is different and 3110 // scale reg is not null, we cannot handle this case due to merge of 3111 // different offsets will be used as ScaleReg. 3112 CanHandle = CanHandle && (DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::BaseOffsField || 3113 !NewAddrMode.ScaledReg); 3114 3115 // We also must reject the case when GV is different and BaseReg installed 3116 // due to we want to use base reg as a merge of GV values. 3117 CanHandle = CanHandle && (DifferentField != ExtAddrMode::BaseGVField || 3118 !NewAddrMode.HasBaseReg); 3119 3120 // Even if NewAddMode is the same we still need to collect it due to 3121 // original value is different. And later we will need all original values 3122 // as anchors during finding the common Phi node. 3123 if (CanHandle) 3124 AddrModes.emplace_back(NewAddrMode); 3125 else 3126 AddrModes.clear(); 3127 3128 return CanHandle; 3129 } 3130 3131 /// Combine the addressing modes we've collected into a single 3132 /// addressing mode. 3133 /// \return True iff we successfully combined them or we only had one so 3134 /// didn't need to combine them anyway. 3135 bool combineAddrModes() { 3136 // If we have no AddrModes then they can't be combined. 3137 if (AddrModes.size() == 0) 3138 return false; 3139 3140 // A single AddrMode can trivially be combined. 3141 if (AddrModes.size() == 1 || DifferentField == ExtAddrMode::NoField) 3142 return true; 3143 3144 // If the AddrModes we collected are all just equal to the value they are 3145 // derived from then combining them wouldn't do anything useful. 3146 if (AllAddrModesTrivial) 3147 return false; 3148 3149 if (!addrModeCombiningAllowed()) 3150 return false; 3151 3152 // Build a map between <original value, basic block where we saw it> to 3153 // value of base register. 3154 // Bail out if there is no common type. 3155 FoldAddrToValueMapping Map; 3156 if (!initializeMap(Map)) 3157 return false; 3158 3159 Value *CommonValue = findCommon(Map); 3160 if (CommonValue) 3161 AddrModes[0].SetCombinedField(DifferentField, CommonValue, AddrModes); 3162 return CommonValue != nullptr; 3163 } 3164 3165 private: 3166 /// Initialize Map with anchor values. For address seen 3167 /// we set the value of different field saw in this address. 3168 /// At the same time we find a common type for different field we will 3169 /// use to create new Phi/Select nodes. Keep it in CommonType field. 3170 /// Return false if there is no common type found. 3171 bool initializeMap(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map) { 3172 // Keep track of keys where the value is null. We will need to replace it 3173 // with constant null when we know the common type. 3174 SmallVector<Value *, 2> NullValue; 3175 Type *IntPtrTy = SQ.DL.getIntPtrType(AddrModes[0].OriginalValue->getType()); 3176 for (auto &AM : AddrModes) { 3177 Value *DV = AM.GetFieldAsValue(DifferentField, IntPtrTy); 3178 if (DV) { 3179 auto *Type = DV->getType(); 3180 if (CommonType && CommonType != Type) 3181 return false; 3182 CommonType = Type; 3183 Map[AM.OriginalValue] = DV; 3184 } else { 3185 NullValue.push_back(AM.OriginalValue); 3186 } 3187 } 3188 assert(CommonType && "At least one non-null value must be!"); 3189 for (auto *V : NullValue) 3190 Map[V] = Constant::getNullValue(CommonType); 3191 return true; 3192 } 3193 3194 /// We have mapping between value A and other value B where B was a field in 3195 /// addressing mode represented by A. Also we have an original value C 3196 /// representing an address we start with. Traversing from C through phi and 3197 /// selects we ended up with A's in a map. This utility function tries to find 3198 /// a value V which is a field in addressing mode C and traversing through phi 3199 /// nodes and selects we will end up in corresponded values B in a map. 3200 /// The utility will create a new Phi/Selects if needed. 3201 // The simple example looks as follows: 3202 // BB1: 3203 // p1 = b1 + 40 3204 // br cond BB2, BB3 3205 // BB2: 3206 // p2 = b2 + 40 3207 // br BB3 3208 // BB3: 3209 // p = phi [p1, BB1], [p2, BB2] 3210 // v = load p 3211 // Map is 3212 // p1 -> b1 3213 // p2 -> b2 3214 // Request is 3215 // p -> ? 3216 // The function tries to find or build phi [b1, BB1], [b2, BB2] in BB3. 3217 Value *findCommon(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map) { 3218 // Tracks the simplification of newly created phi nodes. The reason we use 3219 // this mapping is because we will add new created Phi nodes in AddrToBase. 3220 // Simplification of Phi nodes is recursive, so some Phi node may 3221 // be simplified after we added it to AddrToBase. In reality this 3222 // simplification is possible only if original phi/selects were not 3223 // simplified yet. 3224 // Using this mapping we can find the current value in AddrToBase. 3225 SimplificationTracker ST(SQ); 3226 3227 // First step, DFS to create PHI nodes for all intermediate blocks. 3228 // Also fill traverse order for the second step. 3229 SmallVector<Value *, 32> TraverseOrder; 3230 InsertPlaceholders(Map, TraverseOrder, ST); 3231 3232 // Second Step, fill new nodes by merged values and simplify if possible. 3233 FillPlaceholders(Map, TraverseOrder, ST); 3234 3235 if (!AddrSinkNewSelects && ST.countNewSelectNodes() > 0) { 3236 ST.destroyNewNodes(CommonType); 3237 return nullptr; 3238 } 3239 3240 // Now we'd like to match New Phi nodes to existed ones. 3241 unsigned PhiNotMatchedCount = 0; 3242 if (!MatchPhiSet(ST, AddrSinkNewPhis, PhiNotMatchedCount)) { 3243 ST.destroyNewNodes(CommonType); 3244 return nullptr; 3245 } 3246 3247 auto *Result = ST.Get(Map.find(Original)->second); 3248 if (Result) { 3249 NumMemoryInstsPhiCreated += ST.countNewPhiNodes() + PhiNotMatchedCount; 3250 NumMemoryInstsSelectCreated += ST.countNewSelectNodes(); 3251 } 3252 return Result; 3253 } 3254 3255 /// Try to match PHI node to Candidate. 3256 /// Matcher tracks the matched Phi nodes. 3257 bool MatchPhiNode(PHINode *PHI, PHINode *Candidate, 3258 SmallSetVector<PHIPair, 8> &Matcher, 3259 PhiNodeSet &PhiNodesToMatch) { 3260 SmallVector<PHIPair, 8> WorkList; 3261 Matcher.insert({ PHI, Candidate }); 3262 WorkList.push_back({ PHI, Candidate }); 3263 SmallSet<PHIPair, 8> Visited; 3264 while (!WorkList.empty()) { 3265 auto Item = WorkList.pop_back_val(); 3266 if (!Visited.insert(Item).second) 3267 continue; 3268 // We iterate over all incoming values to Phi to compare them. 3269 // If values are different and both of them Phi and the first one is a 3270 // Phi we added (subject to match) and both of them is in the same basic 3271 // block then we can match our pair if values match. So we state that 3272 // these values match and add it to work list to verify that. 3273 for (auto B : Item.first->blocks()) { 3274 Value *FirstValue = Item.first->getIncomingValueForBlock(B); 3275 Value *SecondValue = Item.second->getIncomingValueForBlock(B); 3276 if (FirstValue == SecondValue) 3277 continue; 3278 3279 PHINode *FirstPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(FirstValue); 3280 PHINode *SecondPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SecondValue); 3281 3282 // One of them is not Phi or 3283 // The first one is not Phi node from the set we'd like to match or 3284 // Phi nodes from different basic blocks then 3285 // we will not be able to match. 3286 if (!FirstPhi || !SecondPhi || !PhiNodesToMatch.count(FirstPhi) || 3287 FirstPhi->getParent() != SecondPhi->getParent()) 3288 return false; 3289 3290 // If we already matched them then continue. 3291 if (Matcher.count({ FirstPhi, SecondPhi })) 3292 continue; 3293 // So the values are different and does not match. So we need them to 3294 // match. 3295 Matcher.insert({ FirstPhi, SecondPhi }); 3296 // But me must check it. 3297 WorkList.push_back({ FirstPhi, SecondPhi }); 3298 } 3299 } 3300 return true; 3301 } 3302 3303 /// For the given set of PHI nodes (in the SimplificationTracker) try 3304 /// to find their equivalents. 3305 /// Returns false if this matching fails and creation of new Phi is disabled. 3306 bool MatchPhiSet(SimplificationTracker &ST, bool AllowNewPhiNodes, 3307 unsigned &PhiNotMatchedCount) { 3308 // Matched and PhiNodesToMatch iterate their elements in a deterministic 3309 // order, so the replacements (ReplacePhi) are also done in a deterministic 3310 // order. 3311 SmallSetVector<PHIPair, 8> Matched; 3312 SmallPtrSet<PHINode *, 8> WillNotMatch; 3313 PhiNodeSet &PhiNodesToMatch = ST.newPhiNodes(); 3314 while (PhiNodesToMatch.size()) { 3315 PHINode *PHI = *PhiNodesToMatch.begin(); 3316 3317 // Add us, if no Phi nodes in the basic block we do not match. 3318 WillNotMatch.clear(); 3319 WillNotMatch.insert(PHI); 3320 3321 // Traverse all Phis until we found equivalent or fail to do that. 3322 bool IsMatched = false; 3323 for (auto &P : PHI->getParent()->phis()) { 3324 if (&P == PHI) 3325 continue; 3326 if ((IsMatched = MatchPhiNode(PHI, &P, Matched, PhiNodesToMatch))) 3327 break; 3328 // If it does not match, collect all Phi nodes from matcher. 3329 // if we end up with no match, them all these Phi nodes will not match 3330 // later. 3331 for (auto M : Matched) 3332 WillNotMatch.insert(M.first); 3333 Matched.clear(); 3334 } 3335 if (IsMatched) { 3336 // Replace all matched values and erase them. 3337 for (auto MV : Matched) 3338 ST.ReplacePhi(MV.first, MV.second); 3339 Matched.clear(); 3340 continue; 3341 } 3342 // If we are not allowed to create new nodes then bail out. 3343 if (!AllowNewPhiNodes) 3344 return false; 3345 // Just remove all seen values in matcher. They will not match anything. 3346 PhiNotMatchedCount += WillNotMatch.size(); 3347 for (auto *P : WillNotMatch) 3348 PhiNodesToMatch.erase(P); 3349 } 3350 return true; 3351 } 3352 /// Fill the placeholders with values from predecessors and simplify them. 3353 void FillPlaceholders(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map, 3354 SmallVectorImpl<Value *> &TraverseOrder, 3355 SimplificationTracker &ST) { 3356 while (!TraverseOrder.empty()) { 3357 Value *Current = TraverseOrder.pop_back_val(); 3358 assert(Map.find(Current) != Map.end() && "No node to fill!!!"); 3359 Value *V = Map[Current]; 3360 3361 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) { 3362 // CurrentValue also must be Select. 3363 auto *CurrentSelect = cast<SelectInst>(Current); 3364 auto *TrueValue = CurrentSelect->getTrueValue(); 3365 assert(Map.find(TrueValue) != Map.end() && "No True Value!"); 3366 Select->setTrueValue(ST.Get(Map[TrueValue])); 3367 auto *FalseValue = CurrentSelect->getFalseValue(); 3368 assert(Map.find(FalseValue) != Map.end() && "No False Value!"); 3369 Select->setFalseValue(ST.Get(Map[FalseValue])); 3370 } else { 3371 // Must be a Phi node then. 3372 PHINode *PHI = cast<PHINode>(V); 3373 auto *CurrentPhi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(Current); 3374 // Fill the Phi node with values from predecessors. 3375 for (auto B : predecessors(PHI->getParent())) { 3376 Value *PV = CurrentPhi->getIncomingValueForBlock(B); 3377 assert(Map.find(PV) != Map.end() && "No predecessor Value!"); 3378 PHI->addIncoming(ST.Get(Map[PV]), B); 3379 } 3380 } 3381 Map[Current] = ST.Simplify(V); 3382 } 3383 } 3384 3385 /// Starting from original value recursively iterates over def-use chain up to 3386 /// known ending values represented in a map. For each traversed phi/select 3387 /// inserts a placeholder Phi or Select. 3388 /// Reports all new created Phi/Select nodes by adding them to set. 3389 /// Also reports and order in what values have been traversed. 3390 void InsertPlaceholders(FoldAddrToValueMapping &Map, 3391 SmallVectorImpl<Value *> &TraverseOrder, 3392 SimplificationTracker &ST) { 3393 SmallVector<Value *, 32> Worklist; 3394 assert((isa<PHINode>(Original) || isa<SelectInst>(Original)) && 3395 "Address must be a Phi or Select node"); 3396 auto *Dummy = UndefValue::get(CommonType); 3397 Worklist.push_back(Original); 3398 while (!Worklist.empty()) { 3399 Value *Current = Worklist.pop_back_val(); 3400 // if it is already visited or it is an ending value then skip it. 3401 if (Map.find(Current) != Map.end()) 3402 continue; 3403 TraverseOrder.push_back(Current); 3404 3405 // CurrentValue must be a Phi node or select. All others must be covered 3406 // by anchors. 3407 if (SelectInst *CurrentSelect = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Current)) { 3408 // Is it OK to get metadata from OrigSelect?! 3409 // Create a Select placeholder with dummy value. 3410 SelectInst *Select = SelectInst::Create( 3411 CurrentSelect->getCondition(), Dummy, Dummy, 3412 CurrentSelect->getName(), CurrentSelect, CurrentSelect); 3413 Map[Current] = Select; 3414 ST.insertNewSelect(Select); 3415 // We are interested in True and False values. 3416 Worklist.push_back(CurrentSelect->getTrueValue()); 3417 Worklist.push_back(CurrentSelect->getFalseValue()); 3418 } else { 3419 // It must be a Phi node then. 3420 PHINode *CurrentPhi = cast<PHINode>(Current); 3421 unsigned PredCount = CurrentPhi->getNumIncomingValues(); 3422 PHINode *PHI = 3423 PHINode::Create(CommonType, PredCount, "sunk_phi", CurrentPhi); 3424 Map[Current] = PHI; 3425 ST.insertNewPhi(PHI); 3426 for (Value *P : CurrentPhi->incoming_values()) 3427 Worklist.push_back(P); 3428 } 3429 } 3430 } 3431 3432 bool addrModeCombiningAllowed() { 3433 if (DisableComplexAddrModes) 3434 return false; 3435 switch (DifferentField) { 3436 default: 3437 return false; 3438 case ExtAddrMode::BaseRegField: 3439 return AddrSinkCombineBaseReg; 3440 case ExtAddrMode::BaseGVField: 3441 return AddrSinkCombineBaseGV; 3442 case ExtAddrMode::BaseOffsField: 3443 return AddrSinkCombineBaseOffs; 3444 case ExtAddrMode::ScaledRegField: 3445 return AddrSinkCombineScaledReg; 3446 } 3447 } 3448 }; 3449 } // end anonymous namespace 3450 3451 /// Try adding ScaleReg*Scale to the current addressing mode. 3452 /// Return true and update AddrMode if this addr mode is legal for the target, 3453 /// false if not. 3454 bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchScaledValue(Value *ScaleReg, int64_t Scale, 3455 unsigned Depth) { 3456 // If Scale is 1, then this is the same as adding ScaleReg to the addressing 3457 // mode. Just process that directly. 3458 if (Scale == 1) 3459 return matchAddr(ScaleReg, Depth); 3460 3461 // If the scale is 0, it takes nothing to add this. 3462 if (Scale == 0) 3463 return true; 3464 3465 // If we already have a scale of this value, we can add to it, otherwise, we 3466 // need an available scale field. 3467 if (AddrMode.Scale != 0 && AddrMode.ScaledReg != ScaleReg) 3468 return false; 3469 3470 ExtAddrMode TestAddrMode = AddrMode; 3471 3472 // Add scale to turn X*4+X*3 -> X*7. This could also do things like 3473 // [A+B + A*7] -> [B+A*8]. 3474 TestAddrMode.Scale += Scale; 3475 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = ScaleReg; 3476 3477 // If the new address isn't legal, bail out. 3478 if (!TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 3479 return false; 3480 3481 // It was legal, so commit it. 3482 AddrMode = TestAddrMode; 3483 3484 // Okay, we decided that we can add ScaleReg+Scale to AddrMode. Check now 3485 // to see if ScaleReg is actually X+C. If so, we can turn this into adding 3486 // X*Scale + C*Scale to addr mode. 3487 ConstantInt *CI = nullptr; Value *AddLHS = nullptr; 3488 if (isa<Instruction>(ScaleReg) && // not a constant expr. 3489 match(ScaleReg, m_Add(m_Value(AddLHS), m_ConstantInt(CI)))) { 3490 TestAddrMode.ScaledReg = AddLHS; 3491 TestAddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue()*TestAddrMode.Scale; 3492 3493 // If this addressing mode is legal, commit it and remember that we folded 3494 // this instruction. 3495 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, TestAddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) { 3496 AddrModeInsts.push_back(cast<Instruction>(ScaleReg)); 3497 AddrMode = TestAddrMode; 3498 return true; 3499 } 3500 } 3501 3502 // Otherwise, not (x+c)*scale, just return what we have. 3503 return true; 3504 } 3505 3506 /// This is a little filter, which returns true if an addressing computation 3507 /// involving I might be folded into a load/store accessing it. 3508 /// This doesn't need to be perfect, but needs to accept at least 3509 /// the set of instructions that MatchOperationAddr can. 3510 static bool MightBeFoldableInst(Instruction *I) { 3511 switch (I->getOpcode()) { 3512 case Instruction::BitCast: 3513 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast: 3514 // Don't touch identity bitcasts. 3515 if (I->getType() == I->getOperand(0)->getType()) 3516 return false; 3517 return I->getType()->isIntOrPtrTy(); 3518 case Instruction::PtrToInt: 3519 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized. 3520 return true; 3521 case Instruction::IntToPtr: 3522 // We know the input is intptr_t, so this is foldable. 3523 return true; 3524 case Instruction::Add: 3525 return true; 3526 case Instruction::Mul: 3527 case Instruction::Shl: 3528 // Can only handle X*C and X << C. 3529 return isa<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1)); 3530 case Instruction::GetElementPtr: 3531 return true; 3532 default: 3533 return false; 3534 } 3535 } 3536 3537 /// Check whether or not \p Val is a legal instruction for \p TLI. 3538 /// \note \p Val is assumed to be the product of some type promotion. 3539 /// Therefore if \p Val has an undefined state in \p TLI, this is assumed 3540 /// to be legal, as the non-promoted value would have had the same state. 3541 static bool isPromotedInstructionLegal(const TargetLowering &TLI, 3542 const DataLayout &DL, Value *Val) { 3543 Instruction *PromotedInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Val); 3544 if (!PromotedInst) 3545 return false; 3546 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(PromotedInst->getOpcode()); 3547 // If the ISDOpcode is undefined, it was undefined before the promotion. 3548 if (!ISDOpcode) 3549 return true; 3550 // Otherwise, check if the promoted instruction is legal or not. 3551 return TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom( 3552 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, PromotedInst->getType())); 3553 } 3554 3555 namespace { 3556 3557 /// Hepler class to perform type promotion. 3558 class TypePromotionHelper { 3559 /// Utility function to add a promoted instruction \p ExtOpnd to 3560 /// \p PromotedInsts and record the type of extension we have seen. 3561 static void addPromotedInst(InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3562 Instruction *ExtOpnd, 3563 bool IsSExt) { 3564 ExtType ExtTy = IsSExt ? SignExtension : ZeroExtension; 3565 InstrToOrigTy::iterator It = PromotedInsts.find(ExtOpnd); 3566 if (It != PromotedInsts.end()) { 3567 // If the new extension is same as original, the information in 3568 // PromotedInsts[ExtOpnd] is still correct. 3569 if (It->second.getInt() == ExtTy) 3570 return; 3571 3572 // Now the new extension is different from old extension, we make 3573 // the type information invalid by setting extension type to 3574 // BothExtension. 3575 ExtTy = BothExtension; 3576 } 3577 PromotedInsts[ExtOpnd] = TypeIsSExt(ExtOpnd->getType(), ExtTy); 3578 } 3579 3580 /// Utility function to query the original type of instruction \p Opnd 3581 /// with a matched extension type. If the extension doesn't match, we 3582 /// cannot use the information we had on the original type. 3583 /// BothExtension doesn't match any extension type. 3584 static const Type *getOrigType(const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3585 Instruction *Opnd, 3586 bool IsSExt) { 3587 ExtType ExtTy = IsSExt ? SignExtension : ZeroExtension; 3588 InstrToOrigTy::const_iterator It = PromotedInsts.find(Opnd); 3589 if (It != PromotedInsts.end() && It->second.getInt() == ExtTy) 3590 return It->second.getPointer(); 3591 return nullptr; 3592 } 3593 3594 /// Utility function to check whether or not a sign or zero extension 3595 /// of \p Inst with \p ConsideredExtType can be moved through \p Inst by 3596 /// either using the operands of \p Inst or promoting \p Inst. 3597 /// The type of the extension is defined by \p IsSExt. 3598 /// In other words, check if: 3599 /// ext (Ty Inst opnd1 opnd2 ... opndN) to ConsideredExtType. 3600 /// #1 Promotion applies: 3601 /// ConsideredExtType Inst (ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType, ...). 3602 /// #2 Operand reuses: 3603 /// ext opnd1 to ConsideredExtType. 3604 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 3605 static bool canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst, Type *ConsideredExtType, 3606 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, bool IsSExt); 3607 3608 /// Utility function to determine if \p OpIdx should be promoted when 3609 /// promoting \p Inst. 3610 static bool shouldExtOperand(const Instruction *Inst, int OpIdx) { 3611 return !(isa<SelectInst>(Inst) && OpIdx == 0); 3612 } 3613 3614 /// Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this 3615 /// operand is a promotable trunc or sext or zext. 3616 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 3617 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all instructions 3618 /// created to promote the operand of Ext. 3619 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts. 3620 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs. 3621 /// Should never be called directly. 3622 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext. 3623 static Value *promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt( 3624 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3625 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3626 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3627 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI); 3628 3629 /// Utility function to promote the operand of \p Ext when this 3630 /// operand is promotable and is not a supported trunc or sext. 3631 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 3632 /// \p CreatedInstsCost[out] contains the cost of all the instructions 3633 /// created to promote the operand of Ext. 3634 /// Newly added extensions are inserted in \p Exts. 3635 /// Newly added truncates are inserted in \p Truncs. 3636 /// Should never be called directly. 3637 /// \return The promoted value which is used instead of Ext. 3638 static Value *promoteOperandForOther(Instruction *Ext, 3639 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3640 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3641 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3642 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3643 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, 3644 const TargetLowering &TLI, bool IsSExt); 3645 3646 /// \see promoteOperandForOther. 3647 static Value *signExtendOperandForOther( 3648 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3649 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3650 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3651 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 3652 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, 3653 Exts, Truncs, TLI, true); 3654 } 3655 3656 /// \see promoteOperandForOther. 3657 static Value *zeroExtendOperandForOther( 3658 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3659 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3660 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3661 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 3662 return promoteOperandForOther(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, 3663 Exts, Truncs, TLI, false); 3664 } 3665 3666 public: 3667 /// Type for the utility function that promotes the operand of Ext. 3668 using Action = Value *(*)(Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3669 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3670 unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3671 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3672 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, 3673 const TargetLowering &TLI); 3674 3675 /// Given a sign/zero extend instruction \p Ext, return the appropriate 3676 /// action to promote the operand of \p Ext instead of using Ext. 3677 /// \return NULL if no promotable action is possible with the current 3678 /// sign extension. 3679 /// \p InsertedInsts keeps track of all the instructions inserted by the 3680 /// other CodeGenPrepare optimizations. This information is important 3681 /// because we do not want to promote these instructions as CodeGenPrepare 3682 /// will reinsert them later. Thus creating an infinite loop: create/remove. 3683 /// \p PromotedInsts maps the instructions to their type before promotion. 3684 static Action getAction(Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts, 3685 const TargetLowering &TLI, 3686 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts); 3687 }; 3688 3689 } // end anonymous namespace 3690 3691 bool TypePromotionHelper::canGetThrough(const Instruction *Inst, 3692 Type *ConsideredExtType, 3693 const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, 3694 bool IsSExt) { 3695 // The promotion helper does not know how to deal with vector types yet. 3696 // To be able to fix that, we would need to fix the places where we 3697 // statically extend, e.g., constants and such. 3698 if (Inst->getType()->isVectorTy()) 3699 return false; 3700 3701 // We can always get through zext. 3702 if (isa<ZExtInst>(Inst)) 3703 return true; 3704 3705 // sext(sext) is ok too. 3706 if (IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Inst)) 3707 return true; 3708 3709 // We can get through binary operator, if it is legal. In other words, the 3710 // binary operator must have a nuw or nsw flag. 3711 const BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(Inst); 3712 if (BinOp && isa<OverflowingBinaryOperator>(BinOp) && 3713 ((!IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoUnsignedWrap()) || 3714 (IsSExt && BinOp->hasNoSignedWrap()))) 3715 return true; 3716 3717 // ext(and(opnd, cst)) --> and(ext(opnd), ext(cst)) 3718 if ((Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::And || 3719 Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or)) 3720 return true; 3721 3722 // ext(xor(opnd, cst)) --> xor(ext(opnd), ext(cst)) 3723 if (Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::Xor) { 3724 const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Inst->getOperand(1)); 3725 // Make sure it is not a NOT. 3726 if (Cst && !Cst->getValue().isAllOnesValue()) 3727 return true; 3728 } 3729 3730 // zext(shrl(opnd, cst)) --> shrl(zext(opnd), zext(cst)) 3731 // It may change a poisoned value into a regular value, like 3732 // zext i32 (shrl i8 %val, 12) --> shrl i32 (zext i8 %val), 12 3733 // poisoned value regular value 3734 // It should be OK since undef covers valid value. 3735 if (Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::LShr && !IsSExt) 3736 return true; 3737 3738 // and(ext(shl(opnd, cst)), cst) --> and(shl(ext(opnd), ext(cst)), cst) 3739 // It may change a poisoned value into a regular value, like 3740 // zext i32 (shl i8 %val, 12) --> shl i32 (zext i8 %val), 12 3741 // poisoned value regular value 3742 // It should be OK since undef covers valid value. 3743 if (Inst->getOpcode() == Instruction::Shl && Inst->hasOneUse()) { 3744 const Instruction *ExtInst = 3745 dyn_cast<const Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin()); 3746 if (ExtInst->hasOneUse()) { 3747 const Instruction *AndInst = 3748 dyn_cast<const Instruction>(*ExtInst->user_begin()); 3749 if (AndInst && AndInst->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) { 3750 const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AndInst->getOperand(1)); 3751 if (Cst && 3752 Cst->getValue().isIntN(Inst->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth())) 3753 return true; 3754 } 3755 } 3756 } 3757 3758 // Check if we can do the following simplification. 3759 // ext(trunc(opnd)) --> ext(opnd) 3760 if (!isa<TruncInst>(Inst)) 3761 return false; 3762 3763 Value *OpndVal = Inst->getOperand(0); 3764 // Check if we can use this operand in the extension. 3765 // If the type is larger than the result type of the extension, we cannot. 3766 if (!OpndVal->getType()->isIntegerTy() || 3767 OpndVal->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() > 3768 ConsideredExtType->getIntegerBitWidth()) 3769 return false; 3770 3771 // If the operand of the truncate is not an instruction, we will not have 3772 // any information on the dropped bits. 3773 // (Actually we could for constant but it is not worth the extra logic). 3774 Instruction *Opnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(OpndVal); 3775 if (!Opnd) 3776 return false; 3777 3778 // Check if the source of the type is narrow enough. 3779 // I.e., check that trunc just drops extended bits of the same kind of 3780 // the extension. 3781 // #1 get the type of the operand and check the kind of the extended bits. 3782 const Type *OpndType = getOrigType(PromotedInsts, Opnd, IsSExt); 3783 if (OpndType) 3784 ; 3785 else if ((IsSExt && isa<SExtInst>(Opnd)) || (!IsSExt && isa<ZExtInst>(Opnd))) 3786 OpndType = Opnd->getOperand(0)->getType(); 3787 else 3788 return false; 3789 3790 // #2 check that the truncate just drops extended bits. 3791 return Inst->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth() >= 3792 OpndType->getIntegerBitWidth(); 3793 } 3794 3795 TypePromotionHelper::Action TypePromotionHelper::getAction( 3796 Instruction *Ext, const SetOfInstrs &InsertedInsts, 3797 const TargetLowering &TLI, const InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts) { 3798 assert((isa<SExtInst>(Ext) || isa<ZExtInst>(Ext)) && 3799 "Unexpected instruction type"); 3800 Instruction *ExtOpnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0)); 3801 Type *ExtTy = Ext->getType(); 3802 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(Ext); 3803 // If the operand of the extension is not an instruction, we cannot 3804 // get through. 3805 // If it, check we can get through. 3806 if (!ExtOpnd || !canGetThrough(ExtOpnd, ExtTy, PromotedInsts, IsSExt)) 3807 return nullptr; 3808 3809 // Do not promote if the operand has been added by codegenprepare. 3810 // Otherwise, it means we are undoing an optimization that is likely to be 3811 // redone, thus causing potential infinite loop. 3812 if (isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) && InsertedInsts.count(ExtOpnd)) 3813 return nullptr; 3814 3815 // SExt or Trunc instructions. 3816 // Return the related handler. 3817 if (isa<SExtInst>(ExtOpnd) || isa<TruncInst>(ExtOpnd) || 3818 isa<ZExtInst>(ExtOpnd)) 3819 return promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt; 3820 3821 // Regular instruction. 3822 // Abort early if we will have to insert non-free instructions. 3823 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse() && !TLI.isTruncateFree(ExtTy, ExtOpnd->getType())) 3824 return nullptr; 3825 return IsSExt ? signExtendOperandForOther : zeroExtendOperandForOther; 3826 } 3827 3828 Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForTruncAndAnyExt( 3829 Instruction *SExt, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3830 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3831 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3832 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 3833 // By construction, the operand of SExt is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot 3834 // get through it and this method should not be called. 3835 Instruction *SExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(SExt->getOperand(0)); 3836 Value *ExtVal = SExt; 3837 bool HasMergedNonFreeExt = false; 3838 if (isa<ZExtInst>(SExtOpnd)) { 3839 // Replace s|zext(zext(opnd)) 3840 // => zext(opnd). 3841 HasMergedNonFreeExt = !TLI.isExtFree(SExtOpnd); 3842 Value *ZExt = 3843 TPT.createZExt(SExt, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0), SExt->getType()); 3844 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(SExt, ZExt); 3845 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExt); 3846 ExtVal = ZExt; 3847 } else { 3848 // Replace z|sext(trunc(opnd)) or sext(sext(opnd)) 3849 // => z|sext(opnd). 3850 TPT.setOperand(SExt, 0, SExtOpnd->getOperand(0)); 3851 } 3852 CreatedInstsCost = 0; 3853 3854 // Remove dead code. 3855 if (SExtOpnd->use_empty()) 3856 TPT.eraseInstruction(SExtOpnd); 3857 3858 // Check if the extension is still needed. 3859 Instruction *ExtInst = dyn_cast<Instruction>(ExtVal); 3860 if (!ExtInst || ExtInst->getType() != ExtInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) { 3861 if (ExtInst) { 3862 if (Exts) 3863 Exts->push_back(ExtInst); 3864 CreatedInstsCost = !TLI.isExtFree(ExtInst) && !HasMergedNonFreeExt; 3865 } 3866 return ExtVal; 3867 } 3868 3869 // At this point we have: ext ty opnd to ty. 3870 // Reassign the uses of ExtInst to the opnd and remove ExtInst. 3871 Value *NextVal = ExtInst->getOperand(0); 3872 TPT.eraseInstruction(ExtInst, NextVal); 3873 return NextVal; 3874 } 3875 3876 Value *TypePromotionHelper::promoteOperandForOther( 3877 Instruction *Ext, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 3878 InstrToOrigTy &PromotedInsts, unsigned &CreatedInstsCost, 3879 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Exts, 3880 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> *Truncs, const TargetLowering &TLI, 3881 bool IsSExt) { 3882 // By construction, the operand of Ext is an instruction. Otherwise we cannot 3883 // get through it and this method should not be called. 3884 Instruction *ExtOpnd = cast<Instruction>(Ext->getOperand(0)); 3885 CreatedInstsCost = 0; 3886 if (!ExtOpnd->hasOneUse()) { 3887 // ExtOpnd will be promoted. 3888 // All its uses, but Ext, will need to use a truncated value of the 3889 // promoted version. 3890 // Create the truncate now. 3891 Value *Trunc = TPT.createTrunc(Ext, ExtOpnd->getType()); 3892 if (Instruction *ITrunc = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Trunc)) { 3893 // Insert it just after the definition. 3894 ITrunc->moveAfter(ExtOpnd); 3895 if (Truncs) 3896 Truncs->push_back(ITrunc); 3897 } 3898 3899 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(ExtOpnd, Trunc); 3900 // Restore the operand of Ext (which has been replaced by the previous call 3901 // to replaceAllUsesWith) to avoid creating a cycle trunc <-> sext. 3902 TPT.setOperand(Ext, 0, ExtOpnd); 3903 } 3904 3905 // Get through the Instruction: 3906 // 1. Update its type. 3907 // 2. Replace the uses of Ext by Inst. 3908 // 3. Extend each operand that needs to be extended. 3909 3910 // Remember the original type of the instruction before promotion. 3911 // This is useful to know that the high bits are sign extended bits. 3912 addPromotedInst(PromotedInsts, ExtOpnd, IsSExt); 3913 // Step #1. 3914 TPT.mutateType(ExtOpnd, Ext->getType()); 3915 // Step #2. 3916 TPT.replaceAllUsesWith(Ext, ExtOpnd); 3917 // Step #3. 3918 Instruction *ExtForOpnd = Ext; 3919 3920 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Propagate Ext to operands\n"); 3921 for (int OpIdx = 0, EndOpIdx = ExtOpnd->getNumOperands(); OpIdx != EndOpIdx; 3922 ++OpIdx) { 3923 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Operand:\n" << *(ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)) << '\n'); 3924 if (ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx)->getType() == Ext->getType() || 3925 !shouldExtOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx)) { 3926 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "No need to propagate\n"); 3927 continue; 3928 } 3929 // Check if we can statically extend the operand. 3930 Value *Opnd = ExtOpnd->getOperand(OpIdx); 3931 if (const ConstantInt *Cst = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Opnd)) { 3932 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n"); 3933 unsigned BitWidth = Ext->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth(); 3934 APInt CstVal = IsSExt ? Cst->getValue().sext(BitWidth) 3935 : Cst->getValue().zext(BitWidth); 3936 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ConstantInt::get(Ext->getType(), CstVal)); 3937 continue; 3938 } 3939 // UndefValue are typed, so we have to statically sign extend them. 3940 if (isa<UndefValue>(Opnd)) { 3941 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Statically extend\n"); 3942 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, UndefValue::get(Ext->getType())); 3943 continue; 3944 } 3945 3946 // Otherwise we have to explicitly sign extend the operand. 3947 // Check if Ext was reused to extend an operand. 3948 if (!ExtForOpnd) { 3949 // If yes, create a new one. 3950 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "More operands to ext\n"); 3951 Value *ValForExtOpnd = IsSExt ? TPT.createSExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType()) 3952 : TPT.createZExt(Ext, Opnd, Ext->getType()); 3953 if (!isa<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd)) { 3954 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ValForExtOpnd); 3955 continue; 3956 } 3957 ExtForOpnd = cast<Instruction>(ValForExtOpnd); 3958 } 3959 if (Exts) 3960 Exts->push_back(ExtForOpnd); 3961 TPT.setOperand(ExtForOpnd, 0, Opnd); 3962 3963 // Move the sign extension before the insertion point. 3964 TPT.moveBefore(ExtForOpnd, ExtOpnd); 3965 TPT.setOperand(ExtOpnd, OpIdx, ExtForOpnd); 3966 CreatedInstsCost += !TLI.isExtFree(ExtForOpnd); 3967 // If more sext are required, new instructions will have to be created. 3968 ExtForOpnd = nullptr; 3969 } 3970 if (ExtForOpnd == Ext) { 3971 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Extension is useless now\n"); 3972 TPT.eraseInstruction(Ext); 3973 } 3974 return ExtOpnd; 3975 } 3976 3977 /// Check whether or not promoting an instruction to a wider type is profitable. 3978 /// \p NewCost gives the cost of extension instructions created by the 3979 /// promotion. 3980 /// \p OldCost gives the cost of extension instructions before the promotion 3981 /// plus the number of instructions that have been 3982 /// matched in the addressing mode the promotion. 3983 /// \p PromotedOperand is the value that has been promoted. 3984 /// \return True if the promotion is profitable, false otherwise. 3985 bool AddressingModeMatcher::isPromotionProfitable( 3986 unsigned NewCost, unsigned OldCost, Value *PromotedOperand) const { 3987 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "OldCost: " << OldCost << "\tNewCost: " << NewCost 3988 << '\n'); 3989 // The cost of the new extensions is greater than the cost of the 3990 // old extension plus what we folded. 3991 // This is not profitable. 3992 if (NewCost > OldCost) 3993 return false; 3994 if (NewCost < OldCost) 3995 return true; 3996 // The promotion is neutral but it may help folding the sign extension in 3997 // loads for instance. 3998 // Check that we did not create an illegal instruction. 3999 return isPromotedInstructionLegal(TLI, DL, PromotedOperand); 4000 } 4001 4002 /// Given an instruction or constant expr, see if we can fold the operation 4003 /// into the addressing mode. If so, update the addressing mode and return 4004 /// true, otherwise return false without modifying AddrMode. 4005 /// If \p MovedAway is not NULL, it contains the information of whether or 4006 /// not AddrInst has to be folded into the addressing mode on success. 4007 /// If \p MovedAway == true, \p AddrInst will not be part of the addressing 4008 /// because it has been moved away. 4009 /// Thus AddrInst must not be added in the matched instructions. 4010 /// This state can happen when AddrInst is a sext, since it may be moved away. 4011 /// Therefore, AddrInst may not be valid when MovedAway is true and it must 4012 /// not be referenced anymore. 4013 bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchOperationAddr(User *AddrInst, unsigned Opcode, 4014 unsigned Depth, 4015 bool *MovedAway) { 4016 // Avoid exponential behavior on extremely deep expression trees. 4017 if (Depth >= 5) return false; 4018 4019 // By default, all matched instructions stay in place. 4020 if (MovedAway) 4021 *MovedAway = false; 4022 4023 switch (Opcode) { 4024 case Instruction::PtrToInt: 4025 // PtrToInt is always a noop, as we know that the int type is pointer sized. 4026 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth); 4027 case Instruction::IntToPtr: { 4028 auto AS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 4029 auto PtrTy = MVT::getIntegerVT(DL.getPointerSizeInBits(AS)); 4030 // This inttoptr is a no-op if the integer type is pointer sized. 4031 if (TLI.getValueType(DL, AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()) == PtrTy) 4032 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth); 4033 return false; 4034 } 4035 case Instruction::BitCast: 4036 // BitCast is always a noop, and we can handle it as long as it is 4037 // int->int or pointer->pointer (we don't want int<->fp or something). 4038 if (AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->isIntOrPtrTy() && 4039 // Don't touch identity bitcasts. These were probably put here by LSR, 4040 // and we don't want to mess around with them. Assume it knows what it 4041 // is doing. 4042 AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType() != AddrInst->getType()) 4043 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth); 4044 return false; 4045 case Instruction::AddrSpaceCast: { 4046 unsigned SrcAS 4047 = AddrInst->getOperand(0)->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 4048 unsigned DestAS = AddrInst->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); 4049 if (TLI.isNoopAddrSpaceCast(SrcAS, DestAS)) 4050 return matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth); 4051 return false; 4052 } 4053 case Instruction::Add: { 4054 // Check to see if we can merge in the RHS then the LHS. If so, we win. 4055 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode; 4056 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size(); 4057 // Start a transaction at this point. 4058 // The LHS may match but not the RHS. 4059 // Therefore, we need a higher level restoration point to undo partially 4060 // matched operation. 4061 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4062 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4063 4064 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1) && 4065 matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) 4066 return true; 4067 4068 // Restore the old addr mode info. 4069 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4070 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4071 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4072 4073 // Otherwise this was over-aggressive. Try merging in the LHS then the RHS. 4074 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1) && 4075 matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(1), Depth+1)) 4076 return true; 4077 4078 // Otherwise we definitely can't merge the ADD in. 4079 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4080 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4081 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4082 break; 4083 } 4084 //case Instruction::Or: 4085 // TODO: We can handle "Or Val, Imm" iff this OR is equivalent to an ADD. 4086 //break; 4087 case Instruction::Mul: 4088 case Instruction::Shl: { 4089 // Can only handle X*C and X << C. 4090 ConstantInt *RHS = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(1)); 4091 if (!RHS || RHS->getBitWidth() > 64) 4092 return false; 4093 int64_t Scale = RHS->getSExtValue(); 4094 if (Opcode == Instruction::Shl) 4095 Scale = 1LL << Scale; 4096 4097 return matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Scale, Depth); 4098 } 4099 case Instruction::GetElementPtr: { 4100 // Scan the GEP. We check it if it contains constant offsets and at most 4101 // one variable offset. 4102 int VariableOperand = -1; 4103 unsigned VariableScale = 0; 4104 4105 int64_t ConstantOffset = 0; 4106 gep_type_iterator GTI = gep_type_begin(AddrInst); 4107 for (unsigned i = 1, e = AddrInst->getNumOperands(); i != e; ++i, ++GTI) { 4108 if (StructType *STy = GTI.getStructTypeOrNull()) { 4109 const StructLayout *SL = DL.getStructLayout(STy); 4110 unsigned Idx = 4111 cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))->getZExtValue(); 4112 ConstantOffset += SL->getElementOffset(Idx); 4113 } else { 4114 uint64_t TypeSize = DL.getTypeAllocSize(GTI.getIndexedType()); 4115 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(AddrInst->getOperand(i))) { 4116 const APInt &CVal = CI->getValue(); 4117 if (CVal.getMinSignedBits() <= 64) { 4118 ConstantOffset += CVal.getSExtValue() * TypeSize; 4119 continue; 4120 } 4121 } 4122 if (TypeSize) { // Scales of zero don't do anything. 4123 // We only allow one variable index at the moment. 4124 if (VariableOperand != -1) 4125 return false; 4126 4127 // Remember the variable index. 4128 VariableOperand = i; 4129 VariableScale = TypeSize; 4130 } 4131 } 4132 } 4133 4134 // A common case is for the GEP to only do a constant offset. In this case, 4135 // just add it to the disp field and check validity. 4136 if (VariableOperand == -1) { 4137 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset; 4138 if (ConstantOffset == 0 || 4139 TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) { 4140 // Check to see if we can fold the base pointer in too. 4141 if (matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) 4142 return true; 4143 } else if (EnableGEPOffsetSplit && isa<GetElementPtrInst>(AddrInst) && 4144 TLI.shouldConsiderGEPOffsetSplit() && Depth == 0 && 4145 ConstantOffset > 0) { 4146 // Record GEPs with non-zero offsets as candidates for splitting in the 4147 // event that the offset cannot fit into the r+i addressing mode. 4148 // Simple and common case that only one GEP is used in calculating the 4149 // address for the memory access. 4150 Value *Base = AddrInst->getOperand(0); 4151 auto *BaseI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Base); 4152 auto *GEP = cast<GetElementPtrInst>(AddrInst); 4153 if (isa<Argument>(Base) || isa<GlobalValue>(Base) || 4154 (BaseI && !isa<CastInst>(BaseI) && 4155 !isa<GetElementPtrInst>(BaseI))) { 4156 // If the base is an instruction, make sure the GEP is not in the same 4157 // basic block as the base. If the base is an argument or global 4158 // value, make sure the GEP is not in the entry block. Otherwise, 4159 // instruction selection can undo the split. Also make sure the 4160 // parent block allows inserting non-PHI instructions before the 4161 // terminator. 4162 BasicBlock *Parent = 4163 BaseI ? BaseI->getParent() : &GEP->getFunction()->getEntryBlock(); 4164 if (GEP->getParent() != Parent && !Parent->getTerminator()->isEHPad()) 4165 LargeOffsetGEP = std::make_pair(GEP, ConstantOffset); 4166 } 4167 } 4168 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= ConstantOffset; 4169 return false; 4170 } 4171 4172 // Save the valid addressing mode in case we can't match. 4173 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode; 4174 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size(); 4175 4176 // See if the scale and offset amount is valid for this target. 4177 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset; 4178 4179 // Match the base operand of the GEP. 4180 if (!matchAddr(AddrInst->getOperand(0), Depth+1)) { 4181 // If it couldn't be matched, just stuff the value in a register. 4182 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg) { 4183 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4184 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4185 return false; 4186 } 4187 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true; 4188 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0); 4189 } 4190 4191 // Match the remaining variable portion of the GEP. 4192 if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand), VariableScale, 4193 Depth)) { 4194 // If it couldn't be matched, try stuffing the base into a register 4195 // instead of matching it, and retrying the match of the scale. 4196 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4197 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4198 if (AddrMode.HasBaseReg) 4199 return false; 4200 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true; 4201 AddrMode.BaseReg = AddrInst->getOperand(0); 4202 AddrMode.BaseOffs += ConstantOffset; 4203 if (!matchScaledValue(AddrInst->getOperand(VariableOperand), 4204 VariableScale, Depth)) { 4205 // If even that didn't work, bail. 4206 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4207 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4208 return false; 4209 } 4210 } 4211 4212 return true; 4213 } 4214 case Instruction::SExt: 4215 case Instruction::ZExt: { 4216 Instruction *Ext = dyn_cast<Instruction>(AddrInst); 4217 if (!Ext) 4218 return false; 4219 4220 // Try to move this ext out of the way of the addressing mode. 4221 // Ask for a method for doing so. 4222 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH = 4223 TypePromotionHelper::getAction(Ext, InsertedInsts, TLI, PromotedInsts); 4224 if (!TPH) 4225 return false; 4226 4227 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4228 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4229 unsigned CreatedInstsCost = 0; 4230 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI.isExtFree(Ext); 4231 Value *PromotedOperand = 4232 TPH(Ext, TPT, PromotedInsts, CreatedInstsCost, nullptr, nullptr, TLI); 4233 // SExt has been moved away. 4234 // Thus either it will be rematched later in the recursive calls or it is 4235 // gone. Anyway, we must not fold it into the addressing mode at this point. 4236 // E.g., 4237 // op = add opnd, 1 4238 // idx = ext op 4239 // addr = gep base, idx 4240 // is now: 4241 // promotedOpnd = ext opnd <- no match here 4242 // op = promoted_add promotedOpnd, 1 <- match (later in recursive calls) 4243 // addr = gep base, op <- match 4244 if (MovedAway) 4245 *MovedAway = true; 4246 4247 assert(PromotedOperand && 4248 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases"); 4249 4250 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode; 4251 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size(); 4252 4253 if (!matchAddr(PromotedOperand, Depth) || 4254 // The total of the new cost is equal to the cost of the created 4255 // instructions. 4256 // The total of the old cost is equal to the cost of the extension plus 4257 // what we have saved in the addressing mode. 4258 !isPromotionProfitable(CreatedInstsCost, 4259 ExtCost + (AddrModeInsts.size() - OldSize), 4260 PromotedOperand)) { 4261 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4262 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4263 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Sign extension does not pay off: rollback\n"); 4264 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4265 return false; 4266 } 4267 return true; 4268 } 4269 } 4270 return false; 4271 } 4272 4273 /// If we can, try to add the value of 'Addr' into the current addressing mode. 4274 /// If Addr can't be added to AddrMode this returns false and leaves AddrMode 4275 /// unmodified. This assumes that Addr is either a pointer type or intptr_t 4276 /// for the target. 4277 /// 4278 bool AddressingModeMatcher::matchAddr(Value *Addr, unsigned Depth) { 4279 // Start a transaction at this point that we will rollback if the matching 4280 // fails. 4281 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4282 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4283 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Addr)) { 4284 // Fold in immediates if legal for the target. 4285 AddrMode.BaseOffs += CI->getSExtValue(); 4286 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 4287 return true; 4288 AddrMode.BaseOffs -= CI->getSExtValue(); 4289 } else if (GlobalValue *GV = dyn_cast<GlobalValue>(Addr)) { 4290 // If this is a global variable, try to fold it into the addressing mode. 4291 if (!AddrMode.BaseGV) { 4292 AddrMode.BaseGV = GV; 4293 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 4294 return true; 4295 AddrMode.BaseGV = nullptr; 4296 } 4297 } else if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Addr)) { 4298 ExtAddrMode BackupAddrMode = AddrMode; 4299 unsigned OldSize = AddrModeInsts.size(); 4300 4301 // Check to see if it is possible to fold this operation. 4302 bool MovedAway = false; 4303 if (matchOperationAddr(I, I->getOpcode(), Depth, &MovedAway)) { 4304 // This instruction may have been moved away. If so, there is nothing 4305 // to check here. 4306 if (MovedAway) 4307 return true; 4308 // Okay, it's possible to fold this. Check to see if it is actually 4309 // *profitable* to do so. We use a simple cost model to avoid increasing 4310 // register pressure too much. 4311 if (I->hasOneUse() || 4312 isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(I, BackupAddrMode, AddrMode)) { 4313 AddrModeInsts.push_back(I); 4314 return true; 4315 } 4316 4317 // It isn't profitable to do this, roll back. 4318 //cerr << "NOT FOLDING: " << *I; 4319 AddrMode = BackupAddrMode; 4320 AddrModeInsts.resize(OldSize); 4321 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4322 } 4323 } else if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Addr)) { 4324 if (matchOperationAddr(CE, CE->getOpcode(), Depth)) 4325 return true; 4326 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4327 } else if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(Addr)) { 4328 // Null pointer gets folded without affecting the addressing mode. 4329 return true; 4330 } 4331 4332 // Worse case, the target should support [reg] addressing modes. :) 4333 if (!AddrMode.HasBaseReg) { 4334 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = true; 4335 AddrMode.BaseReg = Addr; 4336 // Still check for legality in case the target supports [imm] but not [i+r]. 4337 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 4338 return true; 4339 AddrMode.HasBaseReg = false; 4340 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr; 4341 } 4342 4343 // If the base register is already taken, see if we can do [r+r]. 4344 if (AddrMode.Scale == 0) { 4345 AddrMode.Scale = 1; 4346 AddrMode.ScaledReg = Addr; 4347 if (TLI.isLegalAddressingMode(DL, AddrMode, AccessTy, AddrSpace)) 4348 return true; 4349 AddrMode.Scale = 0; 4350 AddrMode.ScaledReg = nullptr; 4351 } 4352 // Couldn't match. 4353 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4354 return false; 4355 } 4356 4357 /// Check to see if all uses of OpVal by the specified inline asm call are due 4358 /// to memory operands. If so, return true, otherwise return false. 4359 static bool IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CallInst *CI, InlineAsm *IA, Value *OpVal, 4360 const TargetLowering &TLI, 4361 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI) { 4362 const Function *F = CI->getFunction(); 4363 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints = 4364 TLI.ParseConstraints(F->getParent()->getDataLayout(), &TRI, 4365 ImmutableCallSite(CI)); 4366 4367 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) { 4368 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i]; 4369 4370 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use. 4371 TLI.ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue()); 4372 4373 // If this asm operand is our Value*, and if it isn't an indirect memory 4374 // operand, we can't fold it! 4375 if (OpInfo.CallOperandVal == OpVal && 4376 (OpInfo.ConstraintType != TargetLowering::C_Memory || 4377 !OpInfo.isIndirect)) 4378 return false; 4379 } 4380 4381 return true; 4382 } 4383 4384 // Max number of memory uses to look at before aborting the search to conserve 4385 // compile time. 4386 static constexpr int MaxMemoryUsesToScan = 20; 4387 4388 /// Recursively walk all the uses of I until we find a memory use. 4389 /// If we find an obviously non-foldable instruction, return true. 4390 /// Add the ultimately found memory instructions to MemoryUses. 4391 static bool FindAllMemoryUses( 4392 Instruction *I, 4393 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<Instruction *, unsigned>> &MemoryUses, 4394 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> &ConsideredInsts, const TargetLowering &TLI, 4395 const TargetRegisterInfo &TRI, int SeenInsts = 0) { 4396 // If we already considered this instruction, we're done. 4397 if (!ConsideredInsts.insert(I).second) 4398 return false; 4399 4400 // If this is an obviously unfoldable instruction, bail out. 4401 if (!MightBeFoldableInst(I)) 4402 return true; 4403 4404 const bool OptSize = I->getFunction()->optForSize(); 4405 4406 // Loop over all the uses, recursively processing them. 4407 for (Use &U : I->uses()) { 4408 // Conservatively return true if we're seeing a large number or a deep chain 4409 // of users. This avoids excessive compilation times in pathological cases. 4410 if (SeenInsts++ >= MaxMemoryUsesToScan) 4411 return true; 4412 4413 Instruction *UserI = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser()); 4414 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(UserI)) { 4415 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(LI, U.getOperandNo())); 4416 continue; 4417 } 4418 4419 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(UserI)) { 4420 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo(); 4421 if (opNo != StoreInst::getPointerOperandIndex()) 4422 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr. 4423 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(SI, opNo)); 4424 continue; 4425 } 4426 4427 if (AtomicRMWInst *RMW = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(UserI)) { 4428 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo(); 4429 if (opNo != AtomicRMWInst::getPointerOperandIndex()) 4430 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr. 4431 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(RMW, opNo)); 4432 continue; 4433 } 4434 4435 if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CmpX = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(UserI)) { 4436 unsigned opNo = U.getOperandNo(); 4437 if (opNo != AtomicCmpXchgInst::getPointerOperandIndex()) 4438 return true; // Storing addr, not into addr. 4439 MemoryUses.push_back(std::make_pair(CmpX, opNo)); 4440 continue; 4441 } 4442 4443 if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(UserI)) { 4444 // If this is a cold call, we can sink the addressing calculation into 4445 // the cold path. See optimizeCallInst 4446 if (!OptSize && CI->hasFnAttr(Attribute::Cold)) 4447 continue; 4448 4449 InlineAsm *IA = dyn_cast<InlineAsm>(CI->getCalledValue()); 4450 if (!IA) return true; 4451 4452 // If this is a memory operand, we're cool, otherwise bail out. 4453 if (!IsOperandAMemoryOperand(CI, IA, I, TLI, TRI)) 4454 return true; 4455 continue; 4456 } 4457 4458 if (FindAllMemoryUses(UserI, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TLI, TRI, 4459 SeenInsts)) 4460 return true; 4461 } 4462 4463 return false; 4464 } 4465 4466 /// Return true if Val is already known to be live at the use site that we're 4467 /// folding it into. If so, there is no cost to include it in the addressing 4468 /// mode. KnownLive1 and KnownLive2 are two values that we know are live at the 4469 /// instruction already. 4470 bool AddressingModeMatcher::valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(Value *Val,Value *KnownLive1, 4471 Value *KnownLive2) { 4472 // If Val is either of the known-live values, we know it is live! 4473 if (Val == nullptr || Val == KnownLive1 || Val == KnownLive2) 4474 return true; 4475 4476 // All values other than instructions and arguments (e.g. constants) are live. 4477 if (!isa<Instruction>(Val) && !isa<Argument>(Val)) return true; 4478 4479 // If Val is a constant sized alloca in the entry block, it is live, this is 4480 // true because it is just a reference to the stack/frame pointer, which is 4481 // live for the whole function. 4482 if (AllocaInst *AI = dyn_cast<AllocaInst>(Val)) 4483 if (AI->isStaticAlloca()) 4484 return true; 4485 4486 // Check to see if this value is already used in the memory instruction's 4487 // block. If so, it's already live into the block at the very least, so we 4488 // can reasonably fold it. 4489 return Val->isUsedInBasicBlock(MemoryInst->getParent()); 4490 } 4491 4492 /// It is possible for the addressing mode of the machine to fold the specified 4493 /// instruction into a load or store that ultimately uses it. 4494 /// However, the specified instruction has multiple uses. 4495 /// Given this, it may actually increase register pressure to fold it 4496 /// into the load. For example, consider this code: 4497 /// 4498 /// X = ... 4499 /// Y = X+1 4500 /// use(Y) -> nonload/store 4501 /// Z = Y+1 4502 /// load Z 4503 /// 4504 /// In this case, Y has multiple uses, and can be folded into the load of Z 4505 /// (yielding load [X+2]). However, doing this will cause both "X" and "X+1" to 4506 /// be live at the use(Y) line. If we don't fold Y into load Z, we use one 4507 /// fewer register. Since Y can't be folded into "use(Y)" we don't increase the 4508 /// number of computations either. 4509 /// 4510 /// Note that this (like most of CodeGenPrepare) is just a rough heuristic. If 4511 /// X was live across 'load Z' for other reasons, we actually *would* want to 4512 /// fold the addressing mode in the Z case. This would make Y die earlier. 4513 bool AddressingModeMatcher:: 4514 isProfitableToFoldIntoAddressingMode(Instruction *I, ExtAddrMode &AMBefore, 4515 ExtAddrMode &AMAfter) { 4516 if (IgnoreProfitability) return true; 4517 4518 // AMBefore is the addressing mode before this instruction was folded into it, 4519 // and AMAfter is the addressing mode after the instruction was folded. Get 4520 // the set of registers referenced by AMAfter and subtract out those 4521 // referenced by AMBefore: this is the set of values which folding in this 4522 // address extends the lifetime of. 4523 // 4524 // Note that there are only two potential values being referenced here, 4525 // BaseReg and ScaleReg (global addresses are always available, as are any 4526 // folded immediates). 4527 Value *BaseReg = AMAfter.BaseReg, *ScaledReg = AMAfter.ScaledReg; 4528 4529 // If the BaseReg or ScaledReg was referenced by the previous addrmode, their 4530 // lifetime wasn't extended by adding this instruction. 4531 if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(BaseReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg)) 4532 BaseReg = nullptr; 4533 if (valueAlreadyLiveAtInst(ScaledReg, AMBefore.BaseReg, AMBefore.ScaledReg)) 4534 ScaledReg = nullptr; 4535 4536 // If folding this instruction (and it's subexprs) didn't extend any live 4537 // ranges, we're ok with it. 4538 if (!BaseReg && !ScaledReg) 4539 return true; 4540 4541 // If all uses of this instruction can have the address mode sunk into them, 4542 // we can remove the addressing mode and effectively trade one live register 4543 // for another (at worst.) In this context, folding an addressing mode into 4544 // the use is just a particularly nice way of sinking it. 4545 SmallVector<std::pair<Instruction*,unsigned>, 16> MemoryUses; 4546 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 16> ConsideredInsts; 4547 if (FindAllMemoryUses(I, MemoryUses, ConsideredInsts, TLI, TRI)) 4548 return false; // Has a non-memory, non-foldable use! 4549 4550 // Now that we know that all uses of this instruction are part of a chain of 4551 // computation involving only operations that could theoretically be folded 4552 // into a memory use, loop over each of these memory operation uses and see 4553 // if they could *actually* fold the instruction. The assumption is that 4554 // addressing modes are cheap and that duplicating the computation involved 4555 // many times is worthwhile, even on a fastpath. For sinking candidates 4556 // (i.e. cold call sites), this serves as a way to prevent excessive code 4557 // growth since most architectures have some reasonable small and fast way to 4558 // compute an effective address. (i.e LEA on x86) 4559 SmallVector<Instruction*, 32> MatchedAddrModeInsts; 4560 for (unsigned i = 0, e = MemoryUses.size(); i != e; ++i) { 4561 Instruction *User = MemoryUses[i].first; 4562 unsigned OpNo = MemoryUses[i].second; 4563 4564 // Get the access type of this use. If the use isn't a pointer, we don't 4565 // know what it accesses. 4566 Value *Address = User->getOperand(OpNo); 4567 PointerType *AddrTy = dyn_cast<PointerType>(Address->getType()); 4568 if (!AddrTy) 4569 return false; 4570 Type *AddressAccessTy = AddrTy->getElementType(); 4571 unsigned AS = AddrTy->getAddressSpace(); 4572 4573 // Do a match against the root of this address, ignoring profitability. This 4574 // will tell us if the addressing mode for the memory operation will 4575 // *actually* cover the shared instruction. 4576 ExtAddrMode Result; 4577 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> LargeOffsetGEP(nullptr, 4578 0); 4579 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4580 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4581 AddressingModeMatcher Matcher( 4582 MatchedAddrModeInsts, TLI, TRI, AddressAccessTy, AS, MemoryInst, Result, 4583 InsertedInsts, PromotedInsts, TPT, LargeOffsetGEP); 4584 Matcher.IgnoreProfitability = true; 4585 bool Success = Matcher.matchAddr(Address, 0); 4586 (void)Success; assert(Success && "Couldn't select *anything*?"); 4587 4588 // The match was to check the profitability, the changes made are not 4589 // part of the original matcher. Therefore, they should be dropped 4590 // otherwise the original matcher will not present the right state. 4591 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4592 4593 // If the match didn't cover I, then it won't be shared by it. 4594 if (!is_contained(MatchedAddrModeInsts, I)) 4595 return false; 4596 4597 MatchedAddrModeInsts.clear(); 4598 } 4599 4600 return true; 4601 } 4602 4603 /// Return true if the specified values are defined in a 4604 /// different basic block than BB. 4605 static bool IsNonLocalValue(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB) { 4606 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) 4607 return I->getParent() != BB; 4608 return false; 4609 } 4610 4611 /// Sink addressing mode computation immediate before MemoryInst if doing so 4612 /// can be done without increasing register pressure. The need for the 4613 /// register pressure constraint means this can end up being an all or nothing 4614 /// decision for all uses of the same addressing computation. 4615 /// 4616 /// Load and Store Instructions often have addressing modes that can do 4617 /// significant amounts of computation. As such, instruction selection will try 4618 /// to get the load or store to do as much computation as possible for the 4619 /// program. The problem is that isel can only see within a single block. As 4620 /// such, we sink as much legal addressing mode work into the block as possible. 4621 /// 4622 /// This method is used to optimize both load/store and inline asms with memory 4623 /// operands. It's also used to sink addressing computations feeding into cold 4624 /// call sites into their (cold) basic block. 4625 /// 4626 /// The motivation for handling sinking into cold blocks is that doing so can 4627 /// both enable other address mode sinking (by satisfying the register pressure 4628 /// constraint above), and reduce register pressure globally (by removing the 4629 /// addressing mode computation from the fast path entirely.). 4630 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeMemoryInst(Instruction *MemoryInst, Value *Addr, 4631 Type *AccessTy, unsigned AddrSpace) { 4632 Value *Repl = Addr; 4633 4634 // Try to collapse single-value PHI nodes. This is necessary to undo 4635 // unprofitable PRE transformations. 4636 SmallVector<Value*, 8> worklist; 4637 SmallPtrSet<Value*, 16> Visited; 4638 worklist.push_back(Addr); 4639 4640 // Use a worklist to iteratively look through PHI and select nodes, and 4641 // ensure that the addressing mode obtained from the non-PHI/select roots of 4642 // the graph are compatible. 4643 bool PhiOrSelectSeen = false; 4644 SmallVector<Instruction*, 16> AddrModeInsts; 4645 const SimplifyQuery SQ(*DL, TLInfo); 4646 AddressingModeCombiner AddrModes(SQ, Addr); 4647 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts); 4648 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 4649 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 4650 while (!worklist.empty()) { 4651 Value *V = worklist.back(); 4652 worklist.pop_back(); 4653 4654 // We allow traversing cyclic Phi nodes. 4655 // In case of success after this loop we ensure that traversing through 4656 // Phi nodes ends up with all cases to compute address of the form 4657 // BaseGV + Base + Scale * Index + Offset 4658 // where Scale and Offset are constans and BaseGV, Base and Index 4659 // are exactly the same Values in all cases. 4660 // It means that BaseGV, Scale and Offset dominate our memory instruction 4661 // and have the same value as they had in address computation represented 4662 // as Phi. So we can safely sink address computation to memory instruction. 4663 if (!Visited.insert(V).second) 4664 continue; 4665 4666 // For a PHI node, push all of its incoming values. 4667 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(V)) { 4668 for (Value *IncValue : P->incoming_values()) 4669 worklist.push_back(IncValue); 4670 PhiOrSelectSeen = true; 4671 continue; 4672 } 4673 // Similar for select. 4674 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) { 4675 worklist.push_back(SI->getFalseValue()); 4676 worklist.push_back(SI->getTrueValue()); 4677 PhiOrSelectSeen = true; 4678 continue; 4679 } 4680 4681 // For non-PHIs, determine the addressing mode being computed. Note that 4682 // the result may differ depending on what other uses our candidate 4683 // addressing instructions might have. 4684 AddrModeInsts.clear(); 4685 std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t> LargeOffsetGEP(nullptr, 4686 0); 4687 ExtAddrMode NewAddrMode = AddressingModeMatcher::Match( 4688 V, AccessTy, AddrSpace, MemoryInst, AddrModeInsts, *TLI, *TRI, 4689 InsertedInsts, PromotedInsts, TPT, LargeOffsetGEP); 4690 4691 GetElementPtrInst *GEP = LargeOffsetGEP.first; 4692 if (GEP && GEP->getParent() != MemoryInst->getParent() && 4693 !NewGEPBases.count(GEP)) { 4694 // If splitting the underlying data structure can reduce the offset of a 4695 // GEP, collect the GEP. Skip the GEPs that are the new bases of 4696 // previously split data structures. 4697 LargeOffsetGEPMap[GEP->getPointerOperand()].push_back(LargeOffsetGEP); 4698 if (LargeOffsetGEPID.find(GEP) == LargeOffsetGEPID.end()) 4699 LargeOffsetGEPID[GEP] = LargeOffsetGEPID.size(); 4700 } 4701 4702 NewAddrMode.OriginalValue = V; 4703 if (!AddrModes.addNewAddrMode(NewAddrMode)) 4704 break; 4705 } 4706 4707 // Try to combine the AddrModes we've collected. If we couldn't collect any, 4708 // or we have multiple but either couldn't combine them or combining them 4709 // wouldn't do anything useful, bail out now. 4710 if (!AddrModes.combineAddrModes()) { 4711 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 4712 return false; 4713 } 4714 TPT.commit(); 4715 4716 // Get the combined AddrMode (or the only AddrMode, if we only had one). 4717 ExtAddrMode AddrMode = AddrModes.getAddrMode(); 4718 4719 // If all the instructions matched are already in this BB, don't do anything. 4720 // If we saw a Phi node then it is not local definitely, and if we saw a select 4721 // then we want to push the address calculation past it even if it's already 4722 // in this BB. 4723 if (!PhiOrSelectSeen && none_of(AddrModeInsts, [&](Value *V) { 4724 return IsNonLocalValue(V, MemoryInst->getParent()); 4725 })) { 4726 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Found local addrmode: " << AddrMode 4727 << "\n"); 4728 return false; 4729 } 4730 4731 // Insert this computation right after this user. Since our caller is 4732 // scanning from the top of the BB to the bottom, reuse of the expr are 4733 // guaranteed to happen later. 4734 IRBuilder<> Builder(MemoryInst); 4735 4736 // Now that we determined the addressing expression we want to use and know 4737 // that we have to sink it into this block. Check to see if we have already 4738 // done this for some other load/store instr in this block. If so, reuse 4739 // the computation. Before attempting reuse, check if the address is valid 4740 // as it may have been erased. 4741 4742 WeakTrackingVH SunkAddrVH = SunkAddrs[Addr]; 4743 4744 Value * SunkAddr = SunkAddrVH.pointsToAliveValue() ? SunkAddrVH : nullptr; 4745 if (SunkAddr) { 4746 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: Reusing nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode 4747 << " for " << *MemoryInst << "\n"); 4748 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType()) 4749 SunkAddr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType()); 4750 } else if (AddrSinkUsingGEPs || 4751 (!AddrSinkUsingGEPs.getNumOccurrences() && TM && TTI->useAA())) { 4752 // By default, we use the GEP-based method when AA is used later. This 4753 // prevents new inttoptr/ptrtoint pairs from degrading AA capabilities. 4754 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode 4755 << " for " << *MemoryInst << "\n"); 4756 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType()); 4757 Value *ResultPtr = nullptr, *ResultIndex = nullptr; 4758 4759 // First, find the pointer. 4760 if (AddrMode.BaseReg && AddrMode.BaseReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) { 4761 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseReg; 4762 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr; 4763 } 4764 4765 if (AddrMode.Scale && AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType()->isPointerTy()) { 4766 // We can't add more than one pointer together, nor can we scale a 4767 // pointer (both of which seem meaningless). 4768 if (ResultPtr || AddrMode.Scale != 1) 4769 return false; 4770 4771 ResultPtr = AddrMode.ScaledReg; 4772 AddrMode.Scale = 0; 4773 } 4774 4775 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math 4776 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since 4777 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when 4778 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths 4779 // do not match instead of extending it. 4780 // 4781 // (See below for code to add the scale.) 4782 if (AddrMode.Scale) { 4783 Type *ScaledRegTy = AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType(); 4784 if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() > 4785 cast<IntegerType>(ScaledRegTy)->getBitWidth()) 4786 return false; 4787 } 4788 4789 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) { 4790 if (ResultPtr) 4791 return false; 4792 4793 ResultPtr = AddrMode.BaseGV; 4794 } 4795 4796 // If the real base value actually came from an inttoptr, then the matcher 4797 // will look through it and provide only the integer value. In that case, 4798 // use it here. 4799 if (!DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(Addr->getType())) { 4800 if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.BaseReg) { 4801 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.BaseReg, Addr->getType(), 4802 "sunkaddr"); 4803 AddrMode.BaseReg = nullptr; 4804 } else if (!ResultPtr && AddrMode.Scale == 1) { 4805 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(AddrMode.ScaledReg, Addr->getType(), 4806 "sunkaddr"); 4807 AddrMode.Scale = 0; 4808 } 4809 } 4810 4811 if (!ResultPtr && 4812 !AddrMode.BaseReg && !AddrMode.Scale && !AddrMode.BaseOffs) { 4813 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType()); 4814 } else if (!ResultPtr) { 4815 return false; 4816 } else { 4817 Type *I8PtrTy = 4818 Builder.getInt8PtrTy(Addr->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace()); 4819 Type *I8Ty = Builder.getInt8Ty(); 4820 4821 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address 4822 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it 4823 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be 4824 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then 4825 // we'd end up sinking both muls. 4826 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) { 4827 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg; 4828 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy) 4829 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr"); 4830 4831 ResultIndex = V; 4832 } 4833 4834 // Add the scale value. 4835 if (AddrMode.Scale) { 4836 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg; 4837 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) { 4838 // done. 4839 } else { 4840 assert(cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() < 4841 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth() && 4842 "We can't transform if ScaledReg is too narrow"); 4843 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4844 } 4845 4846 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1) 4847 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale), 4848 "sunkaddr"); 4849 if (ResultIndex) 4850 ResultIndex = Builder.CreateAdd(ResultIndex, V, "sunkaddr"); 4851 else 4852 ResultIndex = V; 4853 } 4854 4855 // Add in the Base Offset if present. 4856 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) { 4857 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs); 4858 if (ResultIndex) { 4859 // We need to add this separately from the scale above to help with 4860 // SDAG consecutive load/store merging. 4861 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy) 4862 ResultPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy); 4863 ResultPtr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr"); 4864 } 4865 4866 ResultIndex = V; 4867 } 4868 4869 if (!ResultIndex) { 4870 SunkAddr = ResultPtr; 4871 } else { 4872 if (ResultPtr->getType() != I8PtrTy) 4873 ResultPtr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(ResultPtr, I8PtrTy); 4874 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, ResultPtr, ResultIndex, "sunkaddr"); 4875 } 4876 4877 if (SunkAddr->getType() != Addr->getType()) 4878 SunkAddr = Builder.CreatePointerCast(SunkAddr, Addr->getType()); 4879 } 4880 } else { 4881 // We'd require a ptrtoint/inttoptr down the line, which we can't do for 4882 // non-integral pointers, so in that case bail out now. 4883 Type *BaseTy = AddrMode.BaseReg ? AddrMode.BaseReg->getType() : nullptr; 4884 Type *ScaleTy = AddrMode.Scale ? AddrMode.ScaledReg->getType() : nullptr; 4885 PointerType *BasePtrTy = dyn_cast_or_null<PointerType>(BaseTy); 4886 PointerType *ScalePtrTy = dyn_cast_or_null<PointerType>(ScaleTy); 4887 if (DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(Addr->getType()) || 4888 (BasePtrTy && DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(BasePtrTy)) || 4889 (ScalePtrTy && DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(ScalePtrTy)) || 4890 (AddrMode.BaseGV && 4891 DL->isNonIntegralPointerType(AddrMode.BaseGV->getType()))) 4892 return false; 4893 4894 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "CGP: SINKING nonlocal addrmode: " << AddrMode 4895 << " for " << *MemoryInst << "\n"); 4896 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(Addr->getType()); 4897 Value *Result = nullptr; 4898 4899 // Start with the base register. Do this first so that subsequent address 4900 // matching finds it last, which will prevent it from trying to match it 4901 // as the scaled value in case it happens to be a mul. That would be 4902 // problematic if we've sunk a different mul for the scale, because then 4903 // we'd end up sinking both muls. 4904 if (AddrMode.BaseReg) { 4905 Value *V = AddrMode.BaseReg; 4906 if (V->getType()->isPointerTy()) 4907 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4908 if (V->getType() != IntPtrTy) 4909 V = Builder.CreateIntCast(V, IntPtrTy, /*isSigned=*/true, "sunkaddr"); 4910 Result = V; 4911 } 4912 4913 // Add the scale value. 4914 if (AddrMode.Scale) { 4915 Value *V = AddrMode.ScaledReg; 4916 if (V->getType() == IntPtrTy) { 4917 // done. 4918 } else if (V->getType()->isPointerTy()) { 4919 V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4920 } else if (cast<IntegerType>(IntPtrTy)->getBitWidth() < 4921 cast<IntegerType>(V->getType())->getBitWidth()) { 4922 V = Builder.CreateTrunc(V, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4923 } else { 4924 // It is only safe to sign extend the BaseReg if we know that the math 4925 // required to create it did not overflow before we extend it. Since 4926 // the original IR value was tossed in favor of a constant back when 4927 // the AddrMode was created we need to bail out gracefully if widths 4928 // do not match instead of extending it. 4929 Instruction *I = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(Result); 4930 if (I && (Result != AddrMode.BaseReg)) 4931 I->eraseFromParent(); 4932 return false; 4933 } 4934 if (AddrMode.Scale != 1) 4935 V = Builder.CreateMul(V, ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.Scale), 4936 "sunkaddr"); 4937 if (Result) 4938 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr"); 4939 else 4940 Result = V; 4941 } 4942 4943 // Add in the BaseGV if present. 4944 if (AddrMode.BaseGV) { 4945 Value *V = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(AddrMode.BaseGV, IntPtrTy, "sunkaddr"); 4946 if (Result) 4947 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr"); 4948 else 4949 Result = V; 4950 } 4951 4952 // Add in the Base Offset if present. 4953 if (AddrMode.BaseOffs) { 4954 Value *V = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, AddrMode.BaseOffs); 4955 if (Result) 4956 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, V, "sunkaddr"); 4957 else 4958 Result = V; 4959 } 4960 4961 if (!Result) 4962 SunkAddr = Constant::getNullValue(Addr->getType()); 4963 else 4964 SunkAddr = Builder.CreateIntToPtr(Result, Addr->getType(), "sunkaddr"); 4965 } 4966 4967 MemoryInst->replaceUsesOfWith(Repl, SunkAddr); 4968 // Store the newly computed address into the cache. In the case we reused a 4969 // value, this should be idempotent. 4970 SunkAddrs[Addr] = WeakTrackingVH(SunkAddr); 4971 4972 // If we have no uses, recursively delete the value and all dead instructions 4973 // using it. 4974 if (Repl->use_empty()) { 4975 // This can cause recursive deletion, which can invalidate our iterator. 4976 // Use a WeakTrackingVH to hold onto it in case this happens. 4977 Value *CurValue = &*CurInstIterator; 4978 WeakTrackingVH IterHandle(CurValue); 4979 BasicBlock *BB = CurInstIterator->getParent(); 4980 4981 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Repl, TLInfo); 4982 4983 if (IterHandle != CurValue) { 4984 // If the iterator instruction was recursively deleted, start over at the 4985 // start of the block. 4986 CurInstIterator = BB->begin(); 4987 SunkAddrs.clear(); 4988 } 4989 } 4990 ++NumMemoryInsts; 4991 return true; 4992 } 4993 4994 /// If there are any memory operands, use OptimizeMemoryInst to sink their 4995 /// address computing into the block when possible / profitable. 4996 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInlineAsmInst(CallInst *CS) { 4997 bool MadeChange = false; 4998 4999 const TargetRegisterInfo *TRI = 5000 TM->getSubtargetImpl(*CS->getFunction())->getRegisterInfo(); 5001 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfoVector TargetConstraints = 5002 TLI->ParseConstraints(*DL, TRI, CS); 5003 unsigned ArgNo = 0; 5004 for (unsigned i = 0, e = TargetConstraints.size(); i != e; ++i) { 5005 TargetLowering::AsmOperandInfo &OpInfo = TargetConstraints[i]; 5006 5007 // Compute the constraint code and ConstraintType to use. 5008 TLI->ComputeConstraintToUse(OpInfo, SDValue()); 5009 5010 if (OpInfo.ConstraintType == TargetLowering::C_Memory && 5011 OpInfo.isIndirect) { 5012 Value *OpVal = CS->getArgOperand(ArgNo++); 5013 MadeChange |= optimizeMemoryInst(CS, OpVal, OpVal->getType(), ~0u); 5014 } else if (OpInfo.Type == InlineAsm::isInput) 5015 ArgNo++; 5016 } 5017 5018 return MadeChange; 5019 } 5020 5021 /// Check if all the uses of \p Val are equivalent (or free) zero or 5022 /// sign extensions. 5023 static bool hasSameExtUse(Value *Val, const TargetLowering &TLI) { 5024 assert(!Val->use_empty() && "Input must have at least one use"); 5025 const Instruction *FirstUser = cast<Instruction>(*Val->user_begin()); 5026 bool IsSExt = isa<SExtInst>(FirstUser); 5027 Type *ExtTy = FirstUser->getType(); 5028 for (const User *U : Val->users()) { 5029 const Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 5030 if ((IsSExt && !isa<SExtInst>(UI)) || (!IsSExt && !isa<ZExtInst>(UI))) 5031 return false; 5032 Type *CurTy = UI->getType(); 5033 // Same input and output types: Same instruction after CSE. 5034 if (CurTy == ExtTy) 5035 continue; 5036 5037 // If IsSExt is true, we are in this situation: 5038 // a = Val 5039 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2 5040 // c = sext ty1 a to ty3 5041 // Assuming ty2 is shorter than ty3, this could be turned into: 5042 // a = Val 5043 // b = sext ty1 a to ty2 5044 // c = sext ty2 b to ty3 5045 // However, the last sext is not free. 5046 if (IsSExt) 5047 return false; 5048 5049 // This is a ZExt, maybe this is free to extend from one type to another. 5050 // In that case, we would not account for a different use. 5051 Type *NarrowTy; 5052 Type *LargeTy; 5053 if (ExtTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth() > 5054 CurTy->getScalarType()->getIntegerBitWidth()) { 5055 NarrowTy = CurTy; 5056 LargeTy = ExtTy; 5057 } else { 5058 NarrowTy = ExtTy; 5059 LargeTy = CurTy; 5060 } 5061 5062 if (!TLI.isZExtFree(NarrowTy, LargeTy)) 5063 return false; 5064 } 5065 // All uses are the same or can be derived from one another for free. 5066 return true; 5067 } 5068 5069 /// Try to speculatively promote extensions in \p Exts and continue 5070 /// promoting through newly promoted operands recursively as far as doing so is 5071 /// profitable. Save extensions profitably moved up, in \p ProfitablyMovedExts. 5072 /// When some promotion happened, \p TPT contains the proper state to revert 5073 /// them. 5074 /// 5075 /// \return true if some promotion happened, false otherwise. 5076 bool CodeGenPrepare::tryToPromoteExts( 5077 TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &Exts, 5078 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &ProfitablyMovedExts, 5079 unsigned CreatedInstsCost) { 5080 bool Promoted = false; 5081 5082 // Iterate over all the extensions to try to promote them. 5083 for (auto I : Exts) { 5084 // Early check if we directly have ext(load). 5085 if (isa<LoadInst>(I->getOperand(0))) { 5086 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I); 5087 continue; 5088 } 5089 5090 // Check whether or not we want to do any promotion. The reason we have 5091 // this check inside the for loop is to catch the case where an extension 5092 // is directly fed by a load because in such case the extension can be moved 5093 // up without any promotion on its operands. 5094 if (!TLI || !TLI->enableExtLdPromotion() || DisableExtLdPromotion) 5095 return false; 5096 5097 // Get the action to perform the promotion. 5098 TypePromotionHelper::Action TPH = 5099 TypePromotionHelper::getAction(I, InsertedInsts, *TLI, PromotedInsts); 5100 // Check if we can promote. 5101 if (!TPH) { 5102 // Save the current extension as we cannot move up through its operand. 5103 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I); 5104 continue; 5105 } 5106 5107 // Save the current state. 5108 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 5109 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 5110 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> NewExts; 5111 unsigned NewCreatedInstsCost = 0; 5112 unsigned ExtCost = !TLI->isExtFree(I); 5113 // Promote. 5114 Value *PromotedVal = TPH(I, TPT, PromotedInsts, NewCreatedInstsCost, 5115 &NewExts, nullptr, *TLI); 5116 assert(PromotedVal && 5117 "TypePromotionHelper should have filtered out those cases"); 5118 5119 // We would be able to merge only one extension in a load. 5120 // Therefore, if we have more than 1 new extension we heuristically 5121 // cut this search path, because it means we degrade the code quality. 5122 // With exactly 2, the transformation is neutral, because we will merge 5123 // one extension but leave one. However, we optimistically keep going, 5124 // because the new extension may be removed too. 5125 long long TotalCreatedInstsCost = CreatedInstsCost + NewCreatedInstsCost; 5126 // FIXME: It would be possible to propagate a negative value instead of 5127 // conservatively ceiling it to 0. 5128 TotalCreatedInstsCost = 5129 std::max((long long)0, (TotalCreatedInstsCost - ExtCost)); 5130 if (!StressExtLdPromotion && 5131 (TotalCreatedInstsCost > 1 || 5132 !isPromotedInstructionLegal(*TLI, *DL, PromotedVal))) { 5133 // This promotion is not profitable, rollback to the previous state, and 5134 // save the current extension in ProfitablyMovedExts as the latest 5135 // speculative promotion turned out to be unprofitable. 5136 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 5137 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I); 5138 continue; 5139 } 5140 // Continue promoting NewExts as far as doing so is profitable. 5141 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> NewlyMovedExts; 5142 (void)tryToPromoteExts(TPT, NewExts, NewlyMovedExts, TotalCreatedInstsCost); 5143 bool NewPromoted = false; 5144 for (auto ExtInst : NewlyMovedExts) { 5145 Instruction *MovedExt = cast<Instruction>(ExtInst); 5146 Value *ExtOperand = MovedExt->getOperand(0); 5147 // If we have reached to a load, we need this extra profitability check 5148 // as it could potentially be merged into an ext(load). 5149 if (isa<LoadInst>(ExtOperand) && 5150 !(StressExtLdPromotion || NewCreatedInstsCost <= ExtCost || 5151 (ExtOperand->hasOneUse() || hasSameExtUse(ExtOperand, *TLI)))) 5152 continue; 5153 5154 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(MovedExt); 5155 NewPromoted = true; 5156 } 5157 5158 // If none of speculative promotions for NewExts is profitable, rollback 5159 // and save the current extension (I) as the last profitable extension. 5160 if (!NewPromoted) { 5161 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 5162 ProfitablyMovedExts.push_back(I); 5163 continue; 5164 } 5165 // The promotion is profitable. 5166 Promoted = true; 5167 } 5168 return Promoted; 5169 } 5170 5171 /// Merging redundant sexts when one is dominating the other. 5172 bool CodeGenPrepare::mergeSExts(Function &F) { 5173 DominatorTree DT(F); 5174 bool Changed = false; 5175 for (auto &Entry : ValToSExtendedUses) { 5176 SExts &Insts = Entry.second; 5177 SExts CurPts; 5178 for (Instruction *Inst : Insts) { 5179 if (RemovedInsts.count(Inst) || !isa<SExtInst>(Inst) || 5180 Inst->getOperand(0) != Entry.first) 5181 continue; 5182 bool inserted = false; 5183 for (auto &Pt : CurPts) { 5184 if (DT.dominates(Inst, Pt)) { 5185 Pt->replaceAllUsesWith(Inst); 5186 RemovedInsts.insert(Pt); 5187 Pt->removeFromParent(); 5188 Pt = Inst; 5189 inserted = true; 5190 Changed = true; 5191 break; 5192 } 5193 if (!DT.dominates(Pt, Inst)) 5194 // Give up if we need to merge in a common dominator as the 5195 // experiments show it is not profitable. 5196 continue; 5197 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(Pt); 5198 RemovedInsts.insert(Inst); 5199 Inst->removeFromParent(); 5200 inserted = true; 5201 Changed = true; 5202 break; 5203 } 5204 if (!inserted) 5205 CurPts.push_back(Inst); 5206 } 5207 } 5208 return Changed; 5209 } 5210 5211 // Spliting large data structures so that the GEPs accessing them can have 5212 // smaller offsets so that they can be sunk to the same blocks as their users. 5213 // For example, a large struct starting from %base is splitted into two parts 5214 // where the second part starts from %new_base. 5215 // 5216 // Before: 5217 // BB0: 5218 // %base = 5219 // 5220 // BB1: 5221 // %gep0 = gep %base, off0 5222 // %gep1 = gep %base, off1 5223 // %gep2 = gep %base, off2 5224 // 5225 // BB2: 5226 // %load1 = load %gep0 5227 // %load2 = load %gep1 5228 // %load3 = load %gep2 5229 // 5230 // After: 5231 // BB0: 5232 // %base = 5233 // %new_base = gep %base, off0 5234 // 5235 // BB1: 5236 // %new_gep0 = %new_base 5237 // %new_gep1 = gep %new_base, off1 - off0 5238 // %new_gep2 = gep %new_base, off2 - off0 5239 // 5240 // BB2: 5241 // %load1 = load i32, i32* %new_gep0 5242 // %load2 = load i32, i32* %new_gep1 5243 // %load3 = load i32, i32* %new_gep2 5244 // 5245 // %new_gep1 and %new_gep2 can be sunk to BB2 now after the splitting because 5246 // their offsets are smaller enough to fit into the addressing mode. 5247 bool CodeGenPrepare::splitLargeGEPOffsets() { 5248 bool Changed = false; 5249 for (auto &Entry : LargeOffsetGEPMap) { 5250 Value *OldBase = Entry.first; 5251 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<AssertingVH<GetElementPtrInst>, int64_t>> 5252 &LargeOffsetGEPs = Entry.second; 5253 auto compareGEPOffset = 5254 [&](const std::pair<GetElementPtrInst *, int64_t> &LHS, 5255 const std::pair<GetElementPtrInst *, int64_t> &RHS) { 5256 if (LHS.first == RHS.first) 5257 return false; 5258 if (LHS.second != RHS.second) 5259 return LHS.second < RHS.second; 5260 return LargeOffsetGEPID[LHS.first] < LargeOffsetGEPID[RHS.first]; 5261 }; 5262 // Sorting all the GEPs of the same data structures based on the offsets. 5263 llvm::sort(LargeOffsetGEPs, compareGEPOffset); 5264 LargeOffsetGEPs.erase( 5265 std::unique(LargeOffsetGEPs.begin(), LargeOffsetGEPs.end()), 5266 LargeOffsetGEPs.end()); 5267 // Skip if all the GEPs have the same offsets. 5268 if (LargeOffsetGEPs.front().second == LargeOffsetGEPs.back().second) 5269 continue; 5270 GetElementPtrInst *BaseGEP = LargeOffsetGEPs.begin()->first; 5271 int64_t BaseOffset = LargeOffsetGEPs.begin()->second; 5272 Value *NewBaseGEP = nullptr; 5273 5274 auto LargeOffsetGEP = LargeOffsetGEPs.begin(); 5275 while (LargeOffsetGEP != LargeOffsetGEPs.end()) { 5276 GetElementPtrInst *GEP = LargeOffsetGEP->first; 5277 int64_t Offset = LargeOffsetGEP->second; 5278 if (Offset != BaseOffset) { 5279 TargetLowering::AddrMode AddrMode; 5280 AddrMode.BaseOffs = Offset - BaseOffset; 5281 // The result type of the GEP might not be the type of the memory 5282 // access. 5283 if (!TLI->isLegalAddressingMode(*DL, AddrMode, 5284 GEP->getResultElementType(), 5285 GEP->getAddressSpace())) { 5286 // We need to create a new base if the offset to the current base is 5287 // too large to fit into the addressing mode. So, a very large struct 5288 // may be splitted into several parts. 5289 BaseGEP = GEP; 5290 BaseOffset = Offset; 5291 NewBaseGEP = nullptr; 5292 } 5293 } 5294 5295 // Generate a new GEP to replace the current one. 5296 LLVMContext &Ctx = GEP->getContext(); 5297 Type *IntPtrTy = DL->getIntPtrType(GEP->getType()); 5298 Type *I8PtrTy = 5299 Type::getInt8PtrTy(Ctx, GEP->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace()); 5300 Type *I8Ty = Type::getInt8Ty(Ctx); 5301 5302 if (!NewBaseGEP) { 5303 // Create a new base if we don't have one yet. Find the insertion 5304 // pointer for the new base first. 5305 BasicBlock::iterator NewBaseInsertPt; 5306 BasicBlock *NewBaseInsertBB; 5307 if (auto *BaseI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(OldBase)) { 5308 // If the base of the struct is an instruction, the new base will be 5309 // inserted close to it. 5310 NewBaseInsertBB = BaseI->getParent(); 5311 if (isa<PHINode>(BaseI)) 5312 NewBaseInsertPt = NewBaseInsertBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 5313 else if (InvokeInst *Invoke = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(BaseI)) { 5314 NewBaseInsertBB = 5315 SplitEdge(NewBaseInsertBB, Invoke->getNormalDest()); 5316 NewBaseInsertPt = NewBaseInsertBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 5317 } else 5318 NewBaseInsertPt = std::next(BaseI->getIterator()); 5319 } else { 5320 // If the current base is an argument or global value, the new base 5321 // will be inserted to the entry block. 5322 NewBaseInsertBB = &BaseGEP->getFunction()->getEntryBlock(); 5323 NewBaseInsertPt = NewBaseInsertBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 5324 } 5325 IRBuilder<> NewBaseBuilder(NewBaseInsertBB, NewBaseInsertPt); 5326 // Create a new base. 5327 Value *BaseIndex = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, BaseOffset); 5328 NewBaseGEP = OldBase; 5329 if (NewBaseGEP->getType() != I8PtrTy) 5330 NewBaseGEP = NewBaseBuilder.CreatePointerCast(NewBaseGEP, I8PtrTy); 5331 NewBaseGEP = 5332 NewBaseBuilder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, NewBaseGEP, BaseIndex, "splitgep"); 5333 NewGEPBases.insert(NewBaseGEP); 5334 } 5335 5336 IRBuilder<> Builder(GEP); 5337 Value *NewGEP = NewBaseGEP; 5338 if (Offset == BaseOffset) { 5339 if (GEP->getType() != I8PtrTy) 5340 NewGEP = Builder.CreatePointerCast(NewGEP, GEP->getType()); 5341 } else { 5342 // Calculate the new offset for the new GEP. 5343 Value *Index = ConstantInt::get(IntPtrTy, Offset - BaseOffset); 5344 NewGEP = Builder.CreateGEP(I8Ty, NewBaseGEP, Index); 5345 5346 if (GEP->getType() != I8PtrTy) 5347 NewGEP = Builder.CreatePointerCast(NewGEP, GEP->getType()); 5348 } 5349 GEP->replaceAllUsesWith(NewGEP); 5350 LargeOffsetGEPID.erase(GEP); 5351 LargeOffsetGEP = LargeOffsetGEPs.erase(LargeOffsetGEP); 5352 GEP->eraseFromParent(); 5353 Changed = true; 5354 } 5355 } 5356 return Changed; 5357 } 5358 5359 /// Return true, if an ext(load) can be formed from an extension in 5360 /// \p MovedExts. 5361 bool CodeGenPrepare::canFormExtLd( 5362 const SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &MovedExts, LoadInst *&LI, 5363 Instruction *&Inst, bool HasPromoted) { 5364 for (auto *MovedExtInst : MovedExts) { 5365 if (isa<LoadInst>(MovedExtInst->getOperand(0))) { 5366 LI = cast<LoadInst>(MovedExtInst->getOperand(0)); 5367 Inst = MovedExtInst; 5368 break; 5369 } 5370 } 5371 if (!LI) 5372 return false; 5373 5374 // If they're already in the same block, there's nothing to do. 5375 // Make the cheap checks first if we did not promote. 5376 // If we promoted, we need to check if it is indeed profitable. 5377 if (!HasPromoted && LI->getParent() == Inst->getParent()) 5378 return false; 5379 5380 return TLI->isExtLoad(LI, Inst, *DL); 5381 } 5382 5383 /// Move a zext or sext fed by a load into the same basic block as the load, 5384 /// unless conditions are unfavorable. This allows SelectionDAG to fold the 5385 /// extend into the load. 5386 /// 5387 /// E.g., 5388 /// \code 5389 /// %ld = load i32* %addr 5390 /// %add = add nuw i32 %ld, 4 5391 /// %zext = zext i32 %add to i64 5392 // \endcode 5393 /// => 5394 /// \code 5395 /// %ld = load i32* %addr 5396 /// %zext = zext i32 %ld to i64 5397 /// %add = add nuw i64 %zext, 4 5398 /// \encode 5399 /// Note that the promotion in %add to i64 is done in tryToPromoteExts(), which 5400 /// allow us to match zext(load i32*) to i64. 5401 /// 5402 /// Also, try to promote the computations used to obtain a sign extended 5403 /// value used into memory accesses. 5404 /// E.g., 5405 /// \code 5406 /// a = add nsw i32 b, 3 5407 /// d = sext i32 a to i64 5408 /// e = getelementptr ..., i64 d 5409 /// \endcode 5410 /// => 5411 /// \code 5412 /// f = sext i32 b to i64 5413 /// a = add nsw i64 f, 3 5414 /// e = getelementptr ..., i64 a 5415 /// \endcode 5416 /// 5417 /// \p Inst[in/out] the extension may be modified during the process if some 5418 /// promotions apply. 5419 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExt(Instruction *&Inst) { 5420 // ExtLoad formation and address type promotion infrastructure requires TLI to 5421 // be effective. 5422 if (!TLI) 5423 return false; 5424 5425 bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader = false; 5426 /// See if it is an interesting sext operations for the address type 5427 /// promotion before trying to promote it, e.g., the ones with the right 5428 /// type and used in memory accesses. 5429 bool ATPConsiderable = TTI->shouldConsiderAddressTypePromotion( 5430 *Inst, AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader); 5431 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts); 5432 TypePromotionTransaction::ConstRestorationPt LastKnownGood = 5433 TPT.getRestorationPoint(); 5434 SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts; 5435 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> SpeculativelyMovedExts; 5436 Exts.push_back(Inst); 5437 5438 bool HasPromoted = tryToPromoteExts(TPT, Exts, SpeculativelyMovedExts); 5439 5440 // Look for a load being extended. 5441 LoadInst *LI = nullptr; 5442 Instruction *ExtFedByLoad; 5443 5444 // Try to promote a chain of computation if it allows to form an extended 5445 // load. 5446 if (canFormExtLd(SpeculativelyMovedExts, LI, ExtFedByLoad, HasPromoted)) { 5447 assert(LI && ExtFedByLoad && "Expect a valid load and extension"); 5448 TPT.commit(); 5449 // Move the extend into the same block as the load 5450 ExtFedByLoad->moveAfter(LI); 5451 // CGP does not check if the zext would be speculatively executed when moved 5452 // to the same basic block as the load. Preserving its original location 5453 // would pessimize the debugging experience, as well as negatively impact 5454 // the quality of sample pgo. We don't want to use "line 0" as that has a 5455 // size cost in the line-table section and logically the zext can be seen as 5456 // part of the load. Therefore we conservatively reuse the same debug 5457 // location for the load and the zext. 5458 ExtFedByLoad->setDebugLoc(LI->getDebugLoc()); 5459 ++NumExtsMoved; 5460 Inst = ExtFedByLoad; 5461 return true; 5462 } 5463 5464 // Continue promoting SExts if known as considerable depending on targets. 5465 if (ATPConsiderable && 5466 performAddressTypePromotion(Inst, AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader, 5467 HasPromoted, TPT, SpeculativelyMovedExts)) 5468 return true; 5469 5470 TPT.rollback(LastKnownGood); 5471 return false; 5472 } 5473 5474 // Perform address type promotion if doing so is profitable. 5475 // If AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader == false, we should find other sext 5476 // instructions that sign extended the same initial value. However, if 5477 // AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader == true, we expect promoting the 5478 // extension is just profitable. 5479 bool CodeGenPrepare::performAddressTypePromotion( 5480 Instruction *&Inst, bool AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader, 5481 bool HasPromoted, TypePromotionTransaction &TPT, 5482 SmallVectorImpl<Instruction *> &SpeculativelyMovedExts) { 5483 bool Promoted = false; 5484 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 1> UnhandledExts; 5485 bool AllSeenFirst = true; 5486 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) { 5487 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0); 5488 DenseMap<Value *, Instruction *>::iterator AlreadySeen = 5489 SeenChainsForSExt.find(HeadOfChain); 5490 // If there is an unhandled SExt which has the same header, try to promote 5491 // it as well. 5492 if (AlreadySeen != SeenChainsForSExt.end()) { 5493 if (AlreadySeen->second != nullptr) 5494 UnhandledExts.insert(AlreadySeen->second); 5495 AllSeenFirst = false; 5496 } 5497 } 5498 5499 if (!AllSeenFirst || (AllowPromotionWithoutCommonHeader && 5500 SpeculativelyMovedExts.size() == 1)) { 5501 TPT.commit(); 5502 if (HasPromoted) 5503 Promoted = true; 5504 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) { 5505 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0); 5506 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = nullptr; 5507 ValToSExtendedUses[HeadOfChain].push_back(I); 5508 } 5509 // Update Inst as promotion happen. 5510 Inst = SpeculativelyMovedExts.pop_back_val(); 5511 } else { 5512 // This is the first chain visited from the header, keep the current chain 5513 // as unhandled. Defer to promote this until we encounter another SExt 5514 // chain derived from the same header. 5515 for (auto I : SpeculativelyMovedExts) { 5516 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0); 5517 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = Inst; 5518 } 5519 return false; 5520 } 5521 5522 if (!AllSeenFirst && !UnhandledExts.empty()) 5523 for (auto VisitedSExt : UnhandledExts) { 5524 if (RemovedInsts.count(VisitedSExt)) 5525 continue; 5526 TypePromotionTransaction TPT(RemovedInsts); 5527 SmallVector<Instruction *, 1> Exts; 5528 SmallVector<Instruction *, 2> Chains; 5529 Exts.push_back(VisitedSExt); 5530 bool HasPromoted = tryToPromoteExts(TPT, Exts, Chains); 5531 TPT.commit(); 5532 if (HasPromoted) 5533 Promoted = true; 5534 for (auto I : Chains) { 5535 Value *HeadOfChain = I->getOperand(0); 5536 // Mark this as handled. 5537 SeenChainsForSExt[HeadOfChain] = nullptr; 5538 ValToSExtendedUses[HeadOfChain].push_back(I); 5539 } 5540 } 5541 return Promoted; 5542 } 5543 5544 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtUses(Instruction *I) { 5545 BasicBlock *DefBB = I->getParent(); 5546 5547 // If the result of a {s|z}ext and its source are both live out, rewrite all 5548 // other uses of the source with result of extension. 5549 Value *Src = I->getOperand(0); 5550 if (Src->hasOneUse()) 5551 return false; 5552 5553 // Only do this xform if truncating is free. 5554 if (TLI && !TLI->isTruncateFree(I->getType(), Src->getType())) 5555 return false; 5556 5557 // Only safe to perform the optimization if the source is also defined in 5558 // this block. 5559 if (!isa<Instruction>(Src) || DefBB != cast<Instruction>(Src)->getParent()) 5560 return false; 5561 5562 bool DefIsLiveOut = false; 5563 for (User *U : I->users()) { 5564 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 5565 5566 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in. 5567 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent(); 5568 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 5569 DefIsLiveOut = true; 5570 break; 5571 } 5572 if (!DefIsLiveOut) 5573 return false; 5574 5575 // Make sure none of the uses are PHI nodes. 5576 for (User *U : Src->users()) { 5577 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 5578 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent(); 5579 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 5580 // Be conservative. We don't want this xform to end up introducing 5581 // reloads just before load / store instructions. 5582 if (isa<PHINode>(UI) || isa<LoadInst>(UI) || isa<StoreInst>(UI)) 5583 return false; 5584 } 5585 5586 // InsertedTruncs - Only insert one trunc in each block once. 5587 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedTruncs; 5588 5589 bool MadeChange = false; 5590 for (Use &U : Src->uses()) { 5591 Instruction *User = cast<Instruction>(U.getUser()); 5592 5593 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in. 5594 BasicBlock *UserBB = User->getParent(); 5595 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 5596 5597 // Both src and def are live in this block. Rewrite the use. 5598 Instruction *&InsertedTrunc = InsertedTruncs[UserBB]; 5599 5600 if (!InsertedTrunc) { 5601 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 5602 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 5603 InsertedTrunc = new TruncInst(I, Src->getType(), "", &*InsertPt); 5604 InsertedInsts.insert(InsertedTrunc); 5605 } 5606 5607 // Replace a use of the {s|z}ext source with a use of the result. 5608 U = InsertedTrunc; 5609 ++NumExtUses; 5610 MadeChange = true; 5611 } 5612 5613 return MadeChange; 5614 } 5615 5616 // Find loads whose uses only use some of the loaded value's bits. Add an "and" 5617 // just after the load if the target can fold this into one extload instruction, 5618 // with the hope of eliminating some of the other later "and" instructions using 5619 // the loaded value. "and"s that are made trivially redundant by the insertion 5620 // of the new "and" are removed by this function, while others (e.g. those whose 5621 // path from the load goes through a phi) are left for isel to potentially 5622 // remove. 5623 // 5624 // For example: 5625 // 5626 // b0: 5627 // x = load i32 5628 // ... 5629 // b1: 5630 // y = and x, 0xff 5631 // z = use y 5632 // 5633 // becomes: 5634 // 5635 // b0: 5636 // x = load i32 5637 // x' = and x, 0xff 5638 // ... 5639 // b1: 5640 // z = use x' 5641 // 5642 // whereas: 5643 // 5644 // b0: 5645 // x1 = load i32 5646 // ... 5647 // b1: 5648 // x2 = load i32 5649 // ... 5650 // b2: 5651 // x = phi x1, x2 5652 // y = and x, 0xff 5653 // 5654 // becomes (after a call to optimizeLoadExt for each load): 5655 // 5656 // b0: 5657 // x1 = load i32 5658 // x1' = and x1, 0xff 5659 // ... 5660 // b1: 5661 // x2 = load i32 5662 // x2' = and x2, 0xff 5663 // ... 5664 // b2: 5665 // x = phi x1', x2' 5666 // y = and x, 0xff 5667 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeLoadExt(LoadInst *Load) { 5668 if (!Load->isSimple() || !Load->getType()->isIntOrPtrTy()) 5669 return false; 5670 5671 // Skip loads we've already transformed. 5672 if (Load->hasOneUse() && 5673 InsertedInsts.count(cast<Instruction>(*Load->user_begin()))) 5674 return false; 5675 5676 // Look at all uses of Load, looking through phis, to determine how many bits 5677 // of the loaded value are needed. 5678 SmallVector<Instruction *, 8> WorkList; 5679 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 16> Visited; 5680 SmallVector<Instruction *, 8> AndsToMaybeRemove; 5681 for (auto *U : Load->users()) 5682 WorkList.push_back(cast<Instruction>(U)); 5683 5684 EVT LoadResultVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, Load->getType()); 5685 unsigned BitWidth = LoadResultVT.getSizeInBits(); 5686 APInt DemandBits(BitWidth, 0); 5687 APInt WidestAndBits(BitWidth, 0); 5688 5689 while (!WorkList.empty()) { 5690 Instruction *I = WorkList.back(); 5691 WorkList.pop_back(); 5692 5693 // Break use-def graph loops. 5694 if (!Visited.insert(I).second) 5695 continue; 5696 5697 // For a PHI node, push all of its users. 5698 if (auto *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) { 5699 for (auto *U : Phi->users()) 5700 WorkList.push_back(cast<Instruction>(U)); 5701 continue; 5702 } 5703 5704 switch (I->getOpcode()) { 5705 case Instruction::And: { 5706 auto *AndC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1)); 5707 if (!AndC) 5708 return false; 5709 APInt AndBits = AndC->getValue(); 5710 DemandBits |= AndBits; 5711 // Keep track of the widest and mask we see. 5712 if (AndBits.ugt(WidestAndBits)) 5713 WidestAndBits = AndBits; 5714 if (AndBits == WidestAndBits && I->getOperand(0) == Load) 5715 AndsToMaybeRemove.push_back(I); 5716 break; 5717 } 5718 5719 case Instruction::Shl: { 5720 auto *ShlC = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(I->getOperand(1)); 5721 if (!ShlC) 5722 return false; 5723 uint64_t ShiftAmt = ShlC->getLimitedValue(BitWidth - 1); 5724 DemandBits.setLowBits(BitWidth - ShiftAmt); 5725 break; 5726 } 5727 5728 case Instruction::Trunc: { 5729 EVT TruncVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, I->getType()); 5730 unsigned TruncBitWidth = TruncVT.getSizeInBits(); 5731 DemandBits.setLowBits(TruncBitWidth); 5732 break; 5733 } 5734 5735 default: 5736 return false; 5737 } 5738 } 5739 5740 uint32_t ActiveBits = DemandBits.getActiveBits(); 5741 // Avoid hoisting (and (load x) 1) since it is unlikely to be folded by the 5742 // target even if isLoadExtLegal says an i1 EXTLOAD is valid. For example, 5743 // for the AArch64 target isLoadExtLegal(ZEXTLOAD, i32, i1) returns true, but 5744 // (and (load x) 1) is not matched as a single instruction, rather as a LDR 5745 // followed by an AND. 5746 // TODO: Look into removing this restriction by fixing backends to either 5747 // return false for isLoadExtLegal for i1 or have them select this pattern to 5748 // a single instruction. 5749 // 5750 // Also avoid hoisting if we didn't see any ands with the exact DemandBits 5751 // mask, since these are the only ands that will be removed by isel. 5752 if (ActiveBits <= 1 || !DemandBits.isMask(ActiveBits) || 5753 WidestAndBits != DemandBits) 5754 return false; 5755 5756 LLVMContext &Ctx = Load->getType()->getContext(); 5757 Type *TruncTy = Type::getIntNTy(Ctx, ActiveBits); 5758 EVT TruncVT = TLI->getValueType(*DL, TruncTy); 5759 5760 // Reject cases that won't be matched as extloads. 5761 if (!LoadResultVT.bitsGT(TruncVT) || !TruncVT.isRound() || 5762 !TLI->isLoadExtLegal(ISD::ZEXTLOAD, LoadResultVT, TruncVT)) 5763 return false; 5764 5765 IRBuilder<> Builder(Load->getNextNode()); 5766 auto *NewAnd = dyn_cast<Instruction>( 5767 Builder.CreateAnd(Load, ConstantInt::get(Ctx, DemandBits))); 5768 // Mark this instruction as "inserted by CGP", so that other 5769 // optimizations don't touch it. 5770 InsertedInsts.insert(NewAnd); 5771 5772 // Replace all uses of load with new and (except for the use of load in the 5773 // new and itself). 5774 Load->replaceAllUsesWith(NewAnd); 5775 NewAnd->setOperand(0, Load); 5776 5777 // Remove any and instructions that are now redundant. 5778 for (auto *And : AndsToMaybeRemove) 5779 // Check that the and mask is the same as the one we decided to put on the 5780 // new and. 5781 if (cast<ConstantInt>(And->getOperand(1))->getValue() == DemandBits) { 5782 And->replaceAllUsesWith(NewAnd); 5783 if (&*CurInstIterator == And) 5784 CurInstIterator = std::next(And->getIterator()); 5785 And->eraseFromParent(); 5786 ++NumAndUses; 5787 } 5788 5789 ++NumAndsAdded; 5790 return true; 5791 } 5792 5793 /// Check if V (an operand of a select instruction) is an expensive instruction 5794 /// that is only used once. 5795 static bool sinkSelectOperand(const TargetTransformInfo *TTI, Value *V) { 5796 auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V); 5797 // If it's safe to speculatively execute, then it should not have side 5798 // effects; therefore, it's safe to sink and possibly *not* execute. 5799 return I && I->hasOneUse() && isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) && 5800 TTI->getUserCost(I) >= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Expensive; 5801 } 5802 5803 /// Returns true if a SelectInst should be turned into an explicit branch. 5804 static bool isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(const TargetTransformInfo *TTI, 5805 const TargetLowering *TLI, 5806 SelectInst *SI) { 5807 // If even a predictable select is cheap, then a branch can't be cheaper. 5808 if (!TLI->isPredictableSelectExpensive()) 5809 return false; 5810 5811 // FIXME: This should use the same heuristics as IfConversion to determine 5812 // whether a select is better represented as a branch. 5813 5814 // If metadata tells us that the select condition is obviously predictable, 5815 // then we want to replace the select with a branch. 5816 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight; 5817 if (SI->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) { 5818 uint64_t Max = std::max(TrueWeight, FalseWeight); 5819 uint64_t Sum = TrueWeight + FalseWeight; 5820 if (Sum != 0) { 5821 auto Probability = BranchProbability::getBranchProbability(Max, Sum); 5822 if (Probability > TLI->getPredictableBranchThreshold()) 5823 return true; 5824 } 5825 } 5826 5827 CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI->getCondition()); 5828 5829 // If a branch is predictable, an out-of-order CPU can avoid blocking on its 5830 // comparison condition. If the compare has more than one use, there's 5831 // probably another cmov or setcc around, so it's not worth emitting a branch. 5832 if (!Cmp || !Cmp->hasOneUse()) 5833 return false; 5834 5835 // If either operand of the select is expensive and only needed on one side 5836 // of the select, we should form a branch. 5837 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getTrueValue()) || 5838 sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getFalseValue())) 5839 return true; 5840 5841 return false; 5842 } 5843 5844 /// If \p isTrue is true, return the true value of \p SI, otherwise return 5845 /// false value of \p SI. If the true/false value of \p SI is defined by any 5846 /// select instructions in \p Selects, look through the defining select 5847 /// instruction until the true/false value is not defined in \p Selects. 5848 static Value *getTrueOrFalseValue( 5849 SelectInst *SI, bool isTrue, 5850 const SmallPtrSet<const Instruction *, 2> &Selects) { 5851 Value *V; 5852 5853 for (SelectInst *DefSI = SI; DefSI != nullptr && Selects.count(DefSI); 5854 DefSI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(V)) { 5855 assert(DefSI->getCondition() == SI->getCondition() && 5856 "The condition of DefSI does not match with SI"); 5857 V = (isTrue ? DefSI->getTrueValue() : DefSI->getFalseValue()); 5858 } 5859 return V; 5860 } 5861 5862 /// If we have a SelectInst that will likely profit from branch prediction, 5863 /// turn it into a branch. 5864 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeSelectInst(SelectInst *SI) { 5865 // If branch conversion isn't desirable, exit early. 5866 if (DisableSelectToBranch || OptSize || !TLI) 5867 return false; 5868 5869 // Find all consecutive select instructions that share the same condition. 5870 SmallVector<SelectInst *, 2> ASI; 5871 ASI.push_back(SI); 5872 for (BasicBlock::iterator It = ++BasicBlock::iterator(SI); 5873 It != SI->getParent()->end(); ++It) { 5874 SelectInst *I = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(&*It); 5875 if (I && SI->getCondition() == I->getCondition()) { 5876 ASI.push_back(I); 5877 } else { 5878 break; 5879 } 5880 } 5881 5882 SelectInst *LastSI = ASI.back(); 5883 // Increment the current iterator to skip all the rest of select instructions 5884 // because they will be either "not lowered" or "all lowered" to branch. 5885 CurInstIterator = std::next(LastSI->getIterator()); 5886 5887 bool VectorCond = !SI->getCondition()->getType()->isIntegerTy(1); 5888 5889 // Can we convert the 'select' to CF ? 5890 if (VectorCond || SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable)) 5891 return false; 5892 5893 TargetLowering::SelectSupportKind SelectKind; 5894 if (VectorCond) 5895 SelectKind = TargetLowering::VectorMaskSelect; 5896 else if (SI->getType()->isVectorTy()) 5897 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarCondVectorVal; 5898 else 5899 SelectKind = TargetLowering::ScalarValSelect; 5900 5901 if (TLI->isSelectSupported(SelectKind) && 5902 !isFormingBranchFromSelectProfitable(TTI, TLI, SI)) 5903 return false; 5904 5905 ModifiedDT = true; 5906 5907 // Transform a sequence like this: 5908 // start: 5909 // %cmp = cmp uge i32 %a, %b 5910 // %sel = select i1 %cmp, i32 %c, i32 %d 5911 // 5912 // Into: 5913 // start: 5914 // %cmp = cmp uge i32 %a, %b 5915 // br i1 %cmp, label %select.true, label %select.false 5916 // select.true: 5917 // br label %select.end 5918 // select.false: 5919 // br label %select.end 5920 // select.end: 5921 // %sel = phi i32 [ %c, %select.true ], [ %d, %select.false ] 5922 // 5923 // In addition, we may sink instructions that produce %c or %d from 5924 // the entry block into the destination(s) of the new branch. 5925 // If the true or false blocks do not contain a sunken instruction, that 5926 // block and its branch may be optimized away. In that case, one side of the 5927 // first branch will point directly to select.end, and the corresponding PHI 5928 // predecessor block will be the start block. 5929 5930 // First, we split the block containing the select into 2 blocks. 5931 BasicBlock *StartBlock = SI->getParent(); 5932 BasicBlock::iterator SplitPt = ++(BasicBlock::iterator(LastSI)); 5933 BasicBlock *EndBlock = StartBlock->splitBasicBlock(SplitPt, "select.end"); 5934 5935 // Delete the unconditional branch that was just created by the split. 5936 StartBlock->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent(); 5937 5938 // These are the new basic blocks for the conditional branch. 5939 // At least one will become an actual new basic block. 5940 BasicBlock *TrueBlock = nullptr; 5941 BasicBlock *FalseBlock = nullptr; 5942 BranchInst *TrueBranch = nullptr; 5943 BranchInst *FalseBranch = nullptr; 5944 5945 // Sink expensive instructions into the conditional blocks to avoid executing 5946 // them speculatively. 5947 for (SelectInst *SI : ASI) { 5948 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getTrueValue())) { 5949 if (TrueBlock == nullptr) { 5950 TrueBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.true.sink", 5951 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock); 5952 TrueBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, TrueBlock); 5953 TrueBranch->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 5954 } 5955 auto *TrueInst = cast<Instruction>(SI->getTrueValue()); 5956 TrueInst->moveBefore(TrueBranch); 5957 } 5958 if (sinkSelectOperand(TTI, SI->getFalseValue())) { 5959 if (FalseBlock == nullptr) { 5960 FalseBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.false.sink", 5961 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock); 5962 FalseBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, FalseBlock); 5963 FalseBranch->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 5964 } 5965 auto *FalseInst = cast<Instruction>(SI->getFalseValue()); 5966 FalseInst->moveBefore(FalseBranch); 5967 } 5968 } 5969 5970 // If there was nothing to sink, then arbitrarily choose the 'false' side 5971 // for a new input value to the PHI. 5972 if (TrueBlock == FalseBlock) { 5973 assert(TrueBlock == nullptr && 5974 "Unexpected basic block transform while optimizing select"); 5975 5976 FalseBlock = BasicBlock::Create(SI->getContext(), "select.false", 5977 EndBlock->getParent(), EndBlock); 5978 auto *FalseBranch = BranchInst::Create(EndBlock, FalseBlock); 5979 FalseBranch->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 5980 } 5981 5982 // Insert the real conditional branch based on the original condition. 5983 // If we did not create a new block for one of the 'true' or 'false' paths 5984 // of the condition, it means that side of the branch goes to the end block 5985 // directly and the path originates from the start block from the point of 5986 // view of the new PHI. 5987 BasicBlock *TT, *FT; 5988 if (TrueBlock == nullptr) { 5989 TT = EndBlock; 5990 FT = FalseBlock; 5991 TrueBlock = StartBlock; 5992 } else if (FalseBlock == nullptr) { 5993 TT = TrueBlock; 5994 FT = EndBlock; 5995 FalseBlock = StartBlock; 5996 } else { 5997 TT = TrueBlock; 5998 FT = FalseBlock; 5999 } 6000 IRBuilder<>(SI).CreateCondBr(SI->getCondition(), TT, FT, SI); 6001 6002 SmallPtrSet<const Instruction *, 2> INS; 6003 INS.insert(ASI.begin(), ASI.end()); 6004 // Use reverse iterator because later select may use the value of the 6005 // earlier select, and we need to propagate value through earlier select 6006 // to get the PHI operand. 6007 for (auto It = ASI.rbegin(); It != ASI.rend(); ++It) { 6008 SelectInst *SI = *It; 6009 // The select itself is replaced with a PHI Node. 6010 PHINode *PN = PHINode::Create(SI->getType(), 2, "", &EndBlock->front()); 6011 PN->takeName(SI); 6012 PN->addIncoming(getTrueOrFalseValue(SI, true, INS), TrueBlock); 6013 PN->addIncoming(getTrueOrFalseValue(SI, false, INS), FalseBlock); 6014 PN->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 6015 6016 SI->replaceAllUsesWith(PN); 6017 SI->eraseFromParent(); 6018 INS.erase(SI); 6019 ++NumSelectsExpanded; 6020 } 6021 6022 // Instruct OptimizeBlock to skip to the next block. 6023 CurInstIterator = StartBlock->end(); 6024 return true; 6025 } 6026 6027 static bool isBroadcastShuffle(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) { 6028 SmallVector<int, 16> Mask(SVI->getShuffleMask()); 6029 int SplatElem = -1; 6030 for (unsigned i = 0; i < Mask.size(); ++i) { 6031 if (SplatElem != -1 && Mask[i] != -1 && Mask[i] != SplatElem) 6032 return false; 6033 SplatElem = Mask[i]; 6034 } 6035 6036 return true; 6037 } 6038 6039 /// Some targets have expensive vector shifts if the lanes aren't all the same 6040 /// (e.g. x86 only introduced "vpsllvd" and friends with AVX2). In these cases 6041 /// it's often worth sinking a shufflevector splat down to its use so that 6042 /// codegen can spot all lanes are identical. 6043 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeShuffleVectorInst(ShuffleVectorInst *SVI) { 6044 BasicBlock *DefBB = SVI->getParent(); 6045 6046 // Only do this xform if variable vector shifts are particularly expensive. 6047 if (!TLI || !TLI->isVectorShiftByScalarCheap(SVI->getType())) 6048 return false; 6049 6050 // We only expect better codegen by sinking a shuffle if we can recognise a 6051 // constant splat. 6052 if (!isBroadcastShuffle(SVI)) 6053 return false; 6054 6055 // InsertedShuffles - Only insert a shuffle in each block once. 6056 DenseMap<BasicBlock*, Instruction*> InsertedShuffles; 6057 6058 bool MadeChange = false; 6059 for (User *U : SVI->users()) { 6060 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U); 6061 6062 // Figure out which BB this ext is used in. 6063 BasicBlock *UserBB = UI->getParent(); 6064 if (UserBB == DefBB) continue; 6065 6066 // For now only apply this when the splat is used by a shift instruction. 6067 if (!UI->isShift()) continue; 6068 6069 // Everything checks out, sink the shuffle if the user's block doesn't 6070 // already have a copy. 6071 Instruction *&InsertedShuffle = InsertedShuffles[UserBB]; 6072 6073 if (!InsertedShuffle) { 6074 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = UserBB->getFirstInsertionPt(); 6075 assert(InsertPt != UserBB->end()); 6076 InsertedShuffle = 6077 new ShuffleVectorInst(SVI->getOperand(0), SVI->getOperand(1), 6078 SVI->getOperand(2), "", &*InsertPt); 6079 } 6080 6081 UI->replaceUsesOfWith(SVI, InsertedShuffle); 6082 MadeChange = true; 6083 } 6084 6085 // If we removed all uses, nuke the shuffle. 6086 if (SVI->use_empty()) { 6087 SVI->eraseFromParent(); 6088 MadeChange = true; 6089 } 6090 6091 return MadeChange; 6092 } 6093 6094 bool CodeGenPrepare::tryToSinkFreeOperands(Instruction *I) { 6095 // If the operands of I can be folded into a target instruction together with 6096 // I, duplicate and sink them. 6097 SmallVector<Use *, 4> OpsToSink; 6098 if (!TLI || !TLI->shouldSinkOperands(I, OpsToSink)) 6099 return false; 6100 6101 // OpsToSink can contain multiple uses in a use chain (e.g. 6102 // (%u1 with %u1 = shufflevector), (%u2 with %u2 = zext %u1)). The dominating 6103 // uses must come first, which means they are sunk first, temporarily creating 6104 // invalid IR. This will be fixed once their dominated users are sunk and 6105 // updated. 6106 BasicBlock *TargetBB = I->getParent(); 6107 bool Changed = false; 6108 SmallVector<Use *, 4> ToReplace; 6109 for (Use *U : OpsToSink) { 6110 auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(U->get()); 6111 if (UI->getParent() == TargetBB || isa<PHINode>(UI)) 6112 continue; 6113 ToReplace.push_back(U); 6114 } 6115 6116 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> MaybeDead; 6117 for (Use *U : ToReplace) { 6118 auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(U->get()); 6119 Instruction *NI = UI->clone(); 6120 MaybeDead.insert(UI); 6121 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Sinking " << *UI << " to user " << *I << "\n"); 6122 NI->insertBefore(I); 6123 InsertedInsts.insert(NI); 6124 U->set(NI); 6125 Changed = true; 6126 } 6127 6128 // Remove instructions that are dead after sinking. 6129 for (auto *I : MaybeDead) 6130 if (!I->hasNUsesOrMore(1)) 6131 I->eraseFromParent(); 6132 6133 return Changed; 6134 } 6135 6136 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeSwitchInst(SwitchInst *SI) { 6137 if (!TLI || !DL) 6138 return false; 6139 6140 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition(); 6141 Type *OldType = Cond->getType(); 6142 LLVMContext &Context = Cond->getContext(); 6143 MVT RegType = TLI->getRegisterType(Context, TLI->getValueType(*DL, OldType)); 6144 unsigned RegWidth = RegType.getSizeInBits(); 6145 6146 if (RegWidth <= cast<IntegerType>(OldType)->getBitWidth()) 6147 return false; 6148 6149 // If the register width is greater than the type width, expand the condition 6150 // of the switch instruction and each case constant to the width of the 6151 // register. By widening the type of the switch condition, subsequent 6152 // comparisons (for case comparisons) will not need to be extended to the 6153 // preferred register width, so we will potentially eliminate N-1 extends, 6154 // where N is the number of cases in the switch. 6155 auto *NewType = Type::getIntNTy(Context, RegWidth); 6156 6157 // Zero-extend the switch condition and case constants unless the switch 6158 // condition is a function argument that is already being sign-extended. 6159 // In that case, we can avoid an unnecessary mask/extension by sign-extending 6160 // everything instead. 6161 Instruction::CastOps ExtType = Instruction::ZExt; 6162 if (auto *Arg = dyn_cast<Argument>(Cond)) 6163 if (Arg->hasSExtAttr()) 6164 ExtType = Instruction::SExt; 6165 6166 auto *ExtInst = CastInst::Create(ExtType, Cond, NewType); 6167 ExtInst->insertBefore(SI); 6168 ExtInst->setDebugLoc(SI->getDebugLoc()); 6169 SI->setCondition(ExtInst); 6170 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) { 6171 APInt NarrowConst = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue(); 6172 APInt WideConst = (ExtType == Instruction::ZExt) ? 6173 NarrowConst.zext(RegWidth) : NarrowConst.sext(RegWidth); 6174 Case.setValue(ConstantInt::get(Context, WideConst)); 6175 } 6176 6177 return true; 6178 } 6179 6180 6181 namespace { 6182 6183 /// Helper class to promote a scalar operation to a vector one. 6184 /// This class is used to move downward extractelement transition. 6185 /// E.g., 6186 /// a = vector_op <2 x i32> 6187 /// b = extractelement <2 x i32> a, i32 0 6188 /// c = scalar_op b 6189 /// store c 6190 /// 6191 /// => 6192 /// a = vector_op <2 x i32> 6193 /// c = vector_op a (equivalent to scalar_op on the related lane) 6194 /// * d = extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0 6195 /// * store d 6196 /// Assuming both extractelement and store can be combine, we get rid of the 6197 /// transition. 6198 class VectorPromoteHelper { 6199 /// DataLayout associated with the current module. 6200 const DataLayout &DL; 6201 6202 /// Used to perform some checks on the legality of vector operations. 6203 const TargetLowering &TLI; 6204 6205 /// Used to estimated the cost of the promoted chain. 6206 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI; 6207 6208 /// The transition being moved downwards. 6209 Instruction *Transition; 6210 6211 /// The sequence of instructions to be promoted. 6212 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> InstsToBePromoted; 6213 6214 /// Cost of combining a store and an extract. 6215 unsigned StoreExtractCombineCost; 6216 6217 /// Instruction that will be combined with the transition. 6218 Instruction *CombineInst = nullptr; 6219 6220 /// The instruction that represents the current end of the transition. 6221 /// Since we are faking the promotion until we reach the end of the chain 6222 /// of computation, we need a way to get the current end of the transition. 6223 Instruction *getEndOfTransition() const { 6224 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty()) 6225 return Transition; 6226 return InstsToBePromoted.back(); 6227 } 6228 6229 /// Return the index of the original value in the transition. 6230 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the original value, 6231 /// c, is at index 0. 6232 unsigned getTransitionOriginalValueIdx() const { 6233 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) && 6234 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet"); 6235 return 0; 6236 } 6237 6238 /// Return the index of the index in the transition. 6239 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 0" the index 6240 /// is at index 1. 6241 unsigned getTransitionIdx() const { 6242 assert(isa<ExtractElementInst>(Transition) && 6243 "Other kind of transitions are not supported yet"); 6244 return 1; 6245 } 6246 6247 /// Get the type of the transition. 6248 /// This is the type of the original value. 6249 /// E.g., for "extractelement <2 x i32> c, i32 1" the type of the 6250 /// transition is <2 x i32>. 6251 Type *getTransitionType() const { 6252 return Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx())->getType(); 6253 } 6254 6255 /// Promote \p ToBePromoted by moving \p Def downward through. 6256 /// I.e., we have the following sequence: 6257 /// Def = Transition <ty1> a to <ty2> 6258 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty2> Def, ... 6259 /// => 6260 /// b = ToBePromoted <ty1> a, ... 6261 /// Def = Transition <ty1> ToBePromoted to <ty2> 6262 void promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted); 6263 6264 /// Check whether or not it is profitable to promote all the 6265 /// instructions enqueued to be promoted. 6266 bool isProfitableToPromote() { 6267 Value *ValIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx()); 6268 unsigned Index = isa<ConstantInt>(ValIdx) 6269 ? cast<ConstantInt>(ValIdx)->getZExtValue() 6270 : -1; 6271 Type *PromotedType = getTransitionType(); 6272 6273 StoreInst *ST = cast<StoreInst>(CombineInst); 6274 unsigned AS = ST->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6275 unsigned Align = ST->getAlignment(); 6276 // Check if this store is supported. 6277 if (!TLI.allowsMisalignedMemoryAccesses( 6278 TLI.getValueType(DL, ST->getValueOperand()->getType()), AS, 6279 Align)) { 6280 // If this is not supported, there is no way we can combine 6281 // the extract with the store. 6282 return false; 6283 } 6284 6285 // The scalar chain of computation has to pay for the transition 6286 // scalar to vector. 6287 // The vector chain has to account for the combining cost. 6288 uint64_t ScalarCost = 6289 TTI.getVectorInstrCost(Transition->getOpcode(), PromotedType, Index); 6290 uint64_t VectorCost = StoreExtractCombineCost; 6291 for (const auto &Inst : InstsToBePromoted) { 6292 // Compute the cost. 6293 // By construction, all instructions being promoted are arithmetic ones. 6294 // Moreover, one argument is a constant that can be viewed as a splat 6295 // constant. 6296 Value *Arg0 = Inst->getOperand(0); 6297 bool IsArg0Constant = isa<UndefValue>(Arg0) || isa<ConstantInt>(Arg0) || 6298 isa<ConstantFP>(Arg0); 6299 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg0OVK = 6300 IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue 6301 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue; 6302 TargetTransformInfo::OperandValueKind Arg1OVK = 6303 !IsArg0Constant ? TargetTransformInfo::OK_UniformConstantValue 6304 : TargetTransformInfo::OK_AnyValue; 6305 ScalarCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost( 6306 Inst->getOpcode(), Inst->getType(), Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK); 6307 VectorCost += TTI.getArithmeticInstrCost(Inst->getOpcode(), PromotedType, 6308 Arg0OVK, Arg1OVK); 6309 } 6310 LLVM_DEBUG( 6311 dbgs() << "Estimated cost of computation to be promoted:\nScalar: " 6312 << ScalarCost << "\nVector: " << VectorCost << '\n'); 6313 return ScalarCost > VectorCost; 6314 } 6315 6316 /// Generate a constant vector with \p Val with the same 6317 /// number of elements as the transition. 6318 /// \p UseSplat defines whether or not \p Val should be replicated 6319 /// across the whole vector. 6320 /// In other words, if UseSplat == true, we generate <Val, Val, ..., Val>, 6321 /// otherwise we generate a vector with as many undef as possible: 6322 /// <undef, ..., undef, Val, undef, ..., undef> where \p Val is only 6323 /// used at the index of the extract. 6324 Value *getConstantVector(Constant *Val, bool UseSplat) const { 6325 unsigned ExtractIdx = std::numeric_limits<unsigned>::max(); 6326 if (!UseSplat) { 6327 // If we cannot determine where the constant must be, we have to 6328 // use a splat constant. 6329 Value *ValExtractIdx = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionIdx()); 6330 if (ConstantInt *CstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ValExtractIdx)) 6331 ExtractIdx = CstVal->getSExtValue(); 6332 else 6333 UseSplat = true; 6334 } 6335 6336 unsigned End = getTransitionType()->getVectorNumElements(); 6337 if (UseSplat) 6338 return ConstantVector::getSplat(End, Val); 6339 6340 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> ConstVec; 6341 UndefValue *UndefVal = UndefValue::get(Val->getType()); 6342 for (unsigned Idx = 0; Idx != End; ++Idx) { 6343 if (Idx == ExtractIdx) 6344 ConstVec.push_back(Val); 6345 else 6346 ConstVec.push_back(UndefVal); 6347 } 6348 return ConstantVector::get(ConstVec); 6349 } 6350 6351 /// Check if promoting to a vector type an operand at \p OperandIdx 6352 /// in \p Use can trigger undefined behavior. 6353 static bool canCauseUndefinedBehavior(const Instruction *Use, 6354 unsigned OperandIdx) { 6355 // This is not safe to introduce undef when the operand is on 6356 // the right hand side of a division-like instruction. 6357 if (OperandIdx != 1) 6358 return false; 6359 switch (Use->getOpcode()) { 6360 default: 6361 return false; 6362 case Instruction::SDiv: 6363 case Instruction::UDiv: 6364 case Instruction::SRem: 6365 case Instruction::URem: 6366 return true; 6367 case Instruction::FDiv: 6368 case Instruction::FRem: 6369 return !Use->hasNoNaNs(); 6370 } 6371 llvm_unreachable(nullptr); 6372 } 6373 6374 public: 6375 VectorPromoteHelper(const DataLayout &DL, const TargetLowering &TLI, 6376 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, Instruction *Transition, 6377 unsigned CombineCost) 6378 : DL(DL), TLI(TLI), TTI(TTI), Transition(Transition), 6379 StoreExtractCombineCost(CombineCost) { 6380 assert(Transition && "Do not know how to promote null"); 6381 } 6382 6383 /// Check if we can promote \p ToBePromoted to \p Type. 6384 bool canPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const { 6385 // We could support CastInst too. 6386 return isa<BinaryOperator>(ToBePromoted); 6387 } 6388 6389 /// Check if it is profitable to promote \p ToBePromoted 6390 /// by moving downward the transition through. 6391 bool shouldPromote(const Instruction *ToBePromoted) const { 6392 // Promote only if all the operands can be statically expanded. 6393 // Indeed, we do not want to introduce any new kind of transitions. 6394 for (const Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) { 6395 const Value *Val = U.get(); 6396 if (Val == getEndOfTransition()) { 6397 // If the use is a division and the transition is on the rhs, 6398 // we cannot promote the operation, otherwise we may create a 6399 // division by zero. 6400 if (canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo())) 6401 return false; 6402 continue; 6403 } 6404 if (!isa<ConstantInt>(Val) && !isa<UndefValue>(Val) && 6405 !isa<ConstantFP>(Val)) 6406 return false; 6407 } 6408 // Check that the resulting operation is legal. 6409 int ISDOpcode = TLI.InstructionOpcodeToISD(ToBePromoted->getOpcode()); 6410 if (!ISDOpcode) 6411 return false; 6412 return StressStoreExtract || 6413 TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom( 6414 ISDOpcode, TLI.getValueType(DL, getTransitionType(), true)); 6415 } 6416 6417 /// Check whether or not \p Use can be combined 6418 /// with the transition. 6419 /// I.e., is it possible to do Use(Transition) => AnotherUse? 6420 bool canCombine(const Instruction *Use) { return isa<StoreInst>(Use); } 6421 6422 /// Record \p ToBePromoted as part of the chain to be promoted. 6423 void enqueueForPromotion(Instruction *ToBePromoted) { 6424 InstsToBePromoted.push_back(ToBePromoted); 6425 } 6426 6427 /// Set the instruction that will be combined with the transition. 6428 void recordCombineInstruction(Instruction *ToBeCombined) { 6429 assert(canCombine(ToBeCombined) && "Unsupported instruction to combine"); 6430 CombineInst = ToBeCombined; 6431 } 6432 6433 /// Promote all the instructions enqueued for promotion if it is 6434 /// is profitable. 6435 /// \return True if the promotion happened, false otherwise. 6436 bool promote() { 6437 // Check if there is something to promote. 6438 // Right now, if we do not have anything to combine with, 6439 // we assume the promotion is not profitable. 6440 if (InstsToBePromoted.empty() || !CombineInst) 6441 return false; 6442 6443 // Check cost. 6444 if (!StressStoreExtract && !isProfitableToPromote()) 6445 return false; 6446 6447 // Promote. 6448 for (auto &ToBePromoted : InstsToBePromoted) 6449 promoteImpl(ToBePromoted); 6450 InstsToBePromoted.clear(); 6451 return true; 6452 } 6453 }; 6454 6455 } // end anonymous namespace 6456 6457 void VectorPromoteHelper::promoteImpl(Instruction *ToBePromoted) { 6458 // At this point, we know that all the operands of ToBePromoted but Def 6459 // can be statically promoted. 6460 // For Def, we need to use its parameter in ToBePromoted: 6461 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 a 6462 // Def = Transition ty1 b to ty2 6463 // Move the transition down. 6464 // 1. Replace all uses of the promoted operation by the transition. 6465 // = ... b => = ... Def. 6466 assert(ToBePromoted->getType() == Transition->getType() && 6467 "The type of the result of the transition does not match " 6468 "the final type"); 6469 ToBePromoted->replaceAllUsesWith(Transition); 6470 // 2. Update the type of the uses. 6471 // b = ToBePromoted ty2 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def. 6472 Type *TransitionTy = getTransitionType(); 6473 ToBePromoted->mutateType(TransitionTy); 6474 // 3. Update all the operands of the promoted operation with promoted 6475 // operands. 6476 // b = ToBePromoted ty1 Def => b = ToBePromoted ty1 a. 6477 for (Use &U : ToBePromoted->operands()) { 6478 Value *Val = U.get(); 6479 Value *NewVal = nullptr; 6480 if (Val == Transition) 6481 NewVal = Transition->getOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx()); 6482 else if (isa<UndefValue>(Val) || isa<ConstantInt>(Val) || 6483 isa<ConstantFP>(Val)) { 6484 // Use a splat constant if it is not safe to use undef. 6485 NewVal = getConstantVector( 6486 cast<Constant>(Val), 6487 isa<UndefValue>(Val) || 6488 canCauseUndefinedBehavior(ToBePromoted, U.getOperandNo())); 6489 } else 6490 llvm_unreachable("Did you modified shouldPromote and forgot to update " 6491 "this?"); 6492 ToBePromoted->setOperand(U.getOperandNo(), NewVal); 6493 } 6494 Transition->moveAfter(ToBePromoted); 6495 Transition->setOperand(getTransitionOriginalValueIdx(), ToBePromoted); 6496 } 6497 6498 /// Some targets can do store(extractelement) with one instruction. 6499 /// Try to push the extractelement towards the stores when the target 6500 /// has this feature and this is profitable. 6501 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeExtractElementInst(Instruction *Inst) { 6502 unsigned CombineCost = std::numeric_limits<unsigned>::max(); 6503 if (DisableStoreExtract || !TLI || 6504 (!StressStoreExtract && 6505 !TLI->canCombineStoreAndExtract(Inst->getOperand(0)->getType(), 6506 Inst->getOperand(1), CombineCost))) 6507 return false; 6508 6509 // At this point we know that Inst is a vector to scalar transition. 6510 // Try to move it down the def-use chain, until: 6511 // - We can combine the transition with its single use 6512 // => we got rid of the transition. 6513 // - We escape the current basic block 6514 // => we would need to check that we are moving it at a cheaper place and 6515 // we do not do that for now. 6516 BasicBlock *Parent = Inst->getParent(); 6517 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Found an interesting transition: " << *Inst << '\n'); 6518 VectorPromoteHelper VPH(*DL, *TLI, *TTI, Inst, CombineCost); 6519 // If the transition has more than one use, assume this is not going to be 6520 // beneficial. 6521 while (Inst->hasOneUse()) { 6522 Instruction *ToBePromoted = cast<Instruction>(*Inst->user_begin()); 6523 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Use: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n'); 6524 6525 if (ToBePromoted->getParent() != Parent) { 6526 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Instruction to promote is in a different block (" 6527 << ToBePromoted->getParent()->getName() 6528 << ") than the transition (" << Parent->getName() 6529 << ").\n"); 6530 return false; 6531 } 6532 6533 if (VPH.canCombine(ToBePromoted)) { 6534 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Assume " << *Inst << '\n' 6535 << "will be combined with: " << *ToBePromoted << '\n'); 6536 VPH.recordCombineInstruction(ToBePromoted); 6537 bool Changed = VPH.promote(); 6538 NumStoreExtractExposed += Changed; 6539 return Changed; 6540 } 6541 6542 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Try promoting.\n"); 6543 if (!VPH.canPromote(ToBePromoted) || !VPH.shouldPromote(ToBePromoted)) 6544 return false; 6545 6546 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Promoting is possible... Enqueue for promotion!\n"); 6547 6548 VPH.enqueueForPromotion(ToBePromoted); 6549 Inst = ToBePromoted; 6550 } 6551 return false; 6552 } 6553 6554 /// For the instruction sequence of store below, F and I values 6555 /// are bundled together as an i64 value before being stored into memory. 6556 /// Sometimes it is more efficient to generate separate stores for F and I, 6557 /// which can remove the bitwise instructions or sink them to colder places. 6558 /// 6559 /// (store (or (zext (bitcast F to i32) to i64), 6560 /// (shl (zext I to i64), 32)), addr) --> 6561 /// (store F, addr) and (store I, addr+4) 6562 /// 6563 /// Similarly, splitting for other merged store can also be beneficial, like: 6564 /// For pair of {i32, i32}, i64 store --> two i32 stores. 6565 /// For pair of {i32, i16}, i64 store --> two i32 stores. 6566 /// For pair of {i16, i16}, i32 store --> two i16 stores. 6567 /// For pair of {i16, i8}, i32 store --> two i16 stores. 6568 /// For pair of {i8, i8}, i16 store --> two i8 stores. 6569 /// 6570 /// We allow each target to determine specifically which kind of splitting is 6571 /// supported. 6572 /// 6573 /// The store patterns are commonly seen from the simple code snippet below 6574 /// if only std::make_pair(...) is sroa transformed before inlined into hoo. 6575 /// void goo(const std::pair<int, float> &); 6576 /// hoo() { 6577 /// ... 6578 /// goo(std::make_pair(tmp, ftmp)); 6579 /// ... 6580 /// } 6581 /// 6582 /// Although we already have similar splitting in DAG Combine, we duplicate 6583 /// it in CodeGenPrepare to catch the case in which pattern is across 6584 /// multiple BBs. The logic in DAG Combine is kept to catch case generated 6585 /// during code expansion. 6586 static bool splitMergedValStore(StoreInst &SI, const DataLayout &DL, 6587 const TargetLowering &TLI) { 6588 // Handle simple but common cases only. 6589 Type *StoreType = SI.getValueOperand()->getType(); 6590 if (DL.getTypeStoreSizeInBits(StoreType) != DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) || 6591 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) == 0) 6592 return false; 6593 6594 unsigned HalfValBitSize = DL.getTypeSizeInBits(StoreType) / 2; 6595 Type *SplitStoreType = Type::getIntNTy(SI.getContext(), HalfValBitSize); 6596 if (DL.getTypeStoreSizeInBits(SplitStoreType) != 6597 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(SplitStoreType)) 6598 return false; 6599 6600 // Match the following patterns: 6601 // (store (or (zext LValue to i64), 6602 // (shl (zext HValue to i64), 32)), HalfValBitSize) 6603 // or 6604 // (store (or (shl (zext HValue to i64), 32)), HalfValBitSize) 6605 // (zext LValue to i64), 6606 // Expect both operands of OR and the first operand of SHL have only 6607 // one use. 6608 Value *LValue, *HValue; 6609 if (!match(SI.getValueOperand(), 6610 m_c_Or(m_OneUse(m_ZExt(m_Value(LValue))), 6611 m_OneUse(m_Shl(m_OneUse(m_ZExt(m_Value(HValue))), 6612 m_SpecificInt(HalfValBitSize)))))) 6613 return false; 6614 6615 // Check LValue and HValue are int with size less or equal than 32. 6616 if (!LValue->getType()->isIntegerTy() || 6617 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(LValue->getType()) > HalfValBitSize || 6618 !HValue->getType()->isIntegerTy() || 6619 DL.getTypeSizeInBits(HValue->getType()) > HalfValBitSize) 6620 return false; 6621 6622 // If LValue/HValue is a bitcast instruction, use the EVT before bitcast 6623 // as the input of target query. 6624 auto *LBC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(LValue); 6625 auto *HBC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(HValue); 6626 EVT LowTy = LBC ? EVT::getEVT(LBC->getOperand(0)->getType()) 6627 : EVT::getEVT(LValue->getType()); 6628 EVT HighTy = HBC ? EVT::getEVT(HBC->getOperand(0)->getType()) 6629 : EVT::getEVT(HValue->getType()); 6630 if (!ForceSplitStore && !TLI.isMultiStoresCheaperThanBitsMerge(LowTy, HighTy)) 6631 return false; 6632 6633 // Start to split store. 6634 IRBuilder<> Builder(SI.getContext()); 6635 Builder.SetInsertPoint(&SI); 6636 6637 // If LValue/HValue is a bitcast in another BB, create a new one in current 6638 // BB so it may be merged with the splitted stores by dag combiner. 6639 if (LBC && LBC->getParent() != SI.getParent()) 6640 LValue = Builder.CreateBitCast(LBC->getOperand(0), LBC->getType()); 6641 if (HBC && HBC->getParent() != SI.getParent()) 6642 HValue = Builder.CreateBitCast(HBC->getOperand(0), HBC->getType()); 6643 6644 bool IsLE = SI.getModule()->getDataLayout().isLittleEndian(); 6645 auto CreateSplitStore = [&](Value *V, bool Upper) { 6646 V = Builder.CreateZExtOrBitCast(V, SplitStoreType); 6647 Value *Addr = Builder.CreateBitCast( 6648 SI.getOperand(1), 6649 SplitStoreType->getPointerTo(SI.getPointerAddressSpace())); 6650 if ((IsLE && Upper) || (!IsLE && !Upper)) 6651 Addr = Builder.CreateGEP( 6652 SplitStoreType, Addr, 6653 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt32Ty(SI.getContext()), 1)); 6654 Builder.CreateAlignedStore( 6655 V, Addr, Upper ? SI.getAlignment() / 2 : SI.getAlignment()); 6656 }; 6657 6658 CreateSplitStore(LValue, false); 6659 CreateSplitStore(HValue, true); 6660 6661 // Delete the old store. 6662 SI.eraseFromParent(); 6663 return true; 6664 } 6665 6666 // Return true if the GEP has two operands, the first operand is of a sequential 6667 // type, and the second operand is a constant. 6668 static bool GEPSequentialConstIndexed(GetElementPtrInst *GEP) { 6669 gep_type_iterator I = gep_type_begin(*GEP); 6670 return GEP->getNumOperands() == 2 && 6671 I.isSequential() && 6672 isa<ConstantInt>(GEP->getOperand(1)); 6673 } 6674 6675 // Try unmerging GEPs to reduce liveness interference (register pressure) across 6676 // IndirectBr edges. Since IndirectBr edges tend to touch on many blocks, 6677 // reducing liveness interference across those edges benefits global register 6678 // allocation. Currently handles only certain cases. 6679 // 6680 // For example, unmerge %GEPI and %UGEPI as below. 6681 // 6682 // ---------- BEFORE ---------- 6683 // SrcBlock: 6684 // ... 6685 // %GEPIOp = ... 6686 // ... 6687 // %GEPI = gep %GEPIOp, Idx 6688 // ... 6689 // indirectbr ... [ label %DstB0, label %DstB1, ... label %DstBi ... ] 6690 // (* %GEPI is alive on the indirectbr edges due to other uses ahead) 6691 // (* %GEPIOp is alive on the indirectbr edges only because of it's used by 6692 // %UGEPI) 6693 // 6694 // DstB0: ... (there may be a gep similar to %UGEPI to be unmerged) 6695 // DstB1: ... (there may be a gep similar to %UGEPI to be unmerged) 6696 // ... 6697 // 6698 // DstBi: 6699 // ... 6700 // %UGEPI = gep %GEPIOp, UIdx 6701 // ... 6702 // --------------------------- 6703 // 6704 // ---------- AFTER ---------- 6705 // SrcBlock: 6706 // ... (same as above) 6707 // (* %GEPI is still alive on the indirectbr edges) 6708 // (* %GEPIOp is no longer alive on the indirectbr edges as a result of the 6709 // unmerging) 6710 // ... 6711 // 6712 // DstBi: 6713 // ... 6714 // %UGEPI = gep %GEPI, (UIdx-Idx) 6715 // ... 6716 // --------------------------- 6717 // 6718 // The register pressure on the IndirectBr edges is reduced because %GEPIOp is 6719 // no longer alive on them. 6720 // 6721 // We try to unmerge GEPs here in CodGenPrepare, as opposed to limiting merging 6722 // of GEPs in the first place in InstCombiner::visitGetElementPtrInst() so as 6723 // not to disable further simplications and optimizations as a result of GEP 6724 // merging. 6725 // 6726 // Note this unmerging may increase the length of the data flow critical path 6727 // (the path from %GEPIOp to %UGEPI would go through %GEPI), which is a tradeoff 6728 // between the register pressure and the length of data-flow critical 6729 // path. Restricting this to the uncommon IndirectBr case would minimize the 6730 // impact of potentially longer critical path, if any, and the impact on compile 6731 // time. 6732 static bool tryUnmergingGEPsAcrossIndirectBr(GetElementPtrInst *GEPI, 6733 const TargetTransformInfo *TTI) { 6734 BasicBlock *SrcBlock = GEPI->getParent(); 6735 // Check that SrcBlock ends with an IndirectBr. If not, give up. The common 6736 // (non-IndirectBr) cases exit early here. 6737 if (!isa<IndirectBrInst>(SrcBlock->getTerminator())) 6738 return false; 6739 // Check that GEPI is a simple gep with a single constant index. 6740 if (!GEPSequentialConstIndexed(GEPI)) 6741 return false; 6742 ConstantInt *GEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(GEPI->getOperand(1)); 6743 // Check that GEPI is a cheap one. 6744 if (TTI->getIntImmCost(GEPIIdx->getValue(), GEPIIdx->getType()) 6745 > TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic) 6746 return false; 6747 Value *GEPIOp = GEPI->getOperand(0); 6748 // Check that GEPIOp is an instruction that's also defined in SrcBlock. 6749 if (!isa<Instruction>(GEPIOp)) 6750 return false; 6751 auto *GEPIOpI = cast<Instruction>(GEPIOp); 6752 if (GEPIOpI->getParent() != SrcBlock) 6753 return false; 6754 // Check that GEP is used outside the block, meaning it's alive on the 6755 // IndirectBr edge(s). 6756 if (find_if(GEPI->users(), [&](User *Usr) { 6757 if (auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Usr)) { 6758 if (I->getParent() != SrcBlock) { 6759 return true; 6760 } 6761 } 6762 return false; 6763 }) == GEPI->users().end()) 6764 return false; 6765 // The second elements of the GEP chains to be unmerged. 6766 std::vector<GetElementPtrInst *> UGEPIs; 6767 // Check each user of GEPIOp to check if unmerging would make GEPIOp not alive 6768 // on IndirectBr edges. 6769 for (User *Usr : GEPIOp->users()) { 6770 if (Usr == GEPI) continue; 6771 // Check if Usr is an Instruction. If not, give up. 6772 if (!isa<Instruction>(Usr)) 6773 return false; 6774 auto *UI = cast<Instruction>(Usr); 6775 // Check if Usr in the same block as GEPIOp, which is fine, skip. 6776 if (UI->getParent() == SrcBlock) 6777 continue; 6778 // Check if Usr is a GEP. If not, give up. 6779 if (!isa<GetElementPtrInst>(Usr)) 6780 return false; 6781 auto *UGEPI = cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Usr); 6782 // Check if UGEPI is a simple gep with a single constant index and GEPIOp is 6783 // the pointer operand to it. If so, record it in the vector. If not, give 6784 // up. 6785 if (!GEPSequentialConstIndexed(UGEPI)) 6786 return false; 6787 if (UGEPI->getOperand(0) != GEPIOp) 6788 return false; 6789 if (GEPIIdx->getType() != 6790 cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1))->getType()) 6791 return false; 6792 ConstantInt *UGEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1)); 6793 if (TTI->getIntImmCost(UGEPIIdx->getValue(), UGEPIIdx->getType()) 6794 > TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic) 6795 return false; 6796 UGEPIs.push_back(UGEPI); 6797 } 6798 if (UGEPIs.size() == 0) 6799 return false; 6800 // Check the materializing cost of (Uidx-Idx). 6801 for (GetElementPtrInst *UGEPI : UGEPIs) { 6802 ConstantInt *UGEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1)); 6803 APInt NewIdx = UGEPIIdx->getValue() - GEPIIdx->getValue(); 6804 unsigned ImmCost = TTI->getIntImmCost(NewIdx, GEPIIdx->getType()); 6805 if (ImmCost > TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic) 6806 return false; 6807 } 6808 // Now unmerge between GEPI and UGEPIs. 6809 for (GetElementPtrInst *UGEPI : UGEPIs) { 6810 UGEPI->setOperand(0, GEPI); 6811 ConstantInt *UGEPIIdx = cast<ConstantInt>(UGEPI->getOperand(1)); 6812 Constant *NewUGEPIIdx = 6813 ConstantInt::get(GEPIIdx->getType(), 6814 UGEPIIdx->getValue() - GEPIIdx->getValue()); 6815 UGEPI->setOperand(1, NewUGEPIIdx); 6816 // If GEPI is not inbounds but UGEPI is inbounds, change UGEPI to not 6817 // inbounds to avoid UB. 6818 if (!GEPI->isInBounds()) { 6819 UGEPI->setIsInBounds(false); 6820 } 6821 } 6822 // After unmerging, verify that GEPIOp is actually only used in SrcBlock (not 6823 // alive on IndirectBr edges). 6824 assert(find_if(GEPIOp->users(), [&](User *Usr) { 6825 return cast<Instruction>(Usr)->getParent() != SrcBlock; 6826 }) == GEPIOp->users().end() && "GEPIOp is used outside SrcBlock"); 6827 return true; 6828 } 6829 6830 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeInst(Instruction *I, bool &ModifiedDT) { 6831 // Bail out if we inserted the instruction to prevent optimizations from 6832 // stepping on each other's toes. 6833 if (InsertedInsts.count(I)) 6834 return false; 6835 6836 if (PHINode *P = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) { 6837 // It is possible for very late stage optimizations (such as SimplifyCFG) 6838 // to introduce PHI nodes too late to be cleaned up. If we detect such a 6839 // trivial PHI, go ahead and zap it here. 6840 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(P, {*DL, TLInfo})) { 6841 P->replaceAllUsesWith(V); 6842 P->eraseFromParent(); 6843 ++NumPHIsElim; 6844 return true; 6845 } 6846 return false; 6847 } 6848 6849 if (CastInst *CI = dyn_cast<CastInst>(I)) { 6850 // If the source of the cast is a constant, then this should have 6851 // already been constant folded. The only reason NOT to constant fold 6852 // it is if something (e.g. LSR) was careful to place the constant 6853 // evaluation in a block other than then one that uses it (e.g. to hoist 6854 // the address of globals out of a loop). If this is the case, we don't 6855 // want to forward-subst the cast. 6856 if (isa<Constant>(CI->getOperand(0))) 6857 return false; 6858 6859 if (TLI && OptimizeNoopCopyExpression(CI, *TLI, *DL)) 6860 return true; 6861 6862 if (isa<ZExtInst>(I) || isa<SExtInst>(I)) { 6863 /// Sink a zext or sext into its user blocks if the target type doesn't 6864 /// fit in one register 6865 if (TLI && 6866 TLI->getTypeAction(CI->getContext(), 6867 TLI->getValueType(*DL, CI->getType())) == 6868 TargetLowering::TypeExpandInteger) { 6869 return SinkCast(CI); 6870 } else { 6871 bool MadeChange = optimizeExt(I); 6872 return MadeChange | optimizeExtUses(I); 6873 } 6874 } 6875 return false; 6876 } 6877 6878 if (auto *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) 6879 if (TLI && optimizeCmp(Cmp, *TLI, *DL, ModifiedDT)) 6880 return true; 6881 6882 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I)) { 6883 LI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group, nullptr); 6884 if (TLI) { 6885 bool Modified = optimizeLoadExt(LI); 6886 unsigned AS = LI->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6887 Modified |= optimizeMemoryInst(I, I->getOperand(0), LI->getType(), AS); 6888 return Modified; 6889 } 6890 return false; 6891 } 6892 6893 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I)) { 6894 if (TLI && splitMergedValStore(*SI, *DL, *TLI)) 6895 return true; 6896 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group, nullptr); 6897 if (TLI) { 6898 unsigned AS = SI->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6899 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, SI->getOperand(1), 6900 SI->getOperand(0)->getType(), AS); 6901 } 6902 return false; 6903 } 6904 6905 if (AtomicRMWInst *RMW = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(I)) { 6906 unsigned AS = RMW->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6907 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, RMW->getPointerOperand(), 6908 RMW->getType(), AS); 6909 } 6910 6911 if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CmpX = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(I)) { 6912 unsigned AS = CmpX->getPointerAddressSpace(); 6913 return optimizeMemoryInst(I, CmpX->getPointerOperand(), 6914 CmpX->getCompareOperand()->getType(), AS); 6915 } 6916 6917 BinaryOperator *BinOp = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(I); 6918 6919 if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) && 6920 EnableAndCmpSinking && TLI) 6921 return sinkAndCmp0Expression(BinOp, *TLI, InsertedInsts); 6922 6923 if (BinOp && (BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::AShr || 6924 BinOp->getOpcode() == Instruction::LShr)) { 6925 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(BinOp->getOperand(1)); 6926 if (TLI && CI && TLI->hasExtractBitsInsn()) 6927 return OptimizeExtractBits(BinOp, CI, *TLI, *DL); 6928 6929 return false; 6930 } 6931 6932 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEPI = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(I)) { 6933 if (GEPI->hasAllZeroIndices()) { 6934 /// The GEP operand must be a pointer, so must its result -> BitCast 6935 Instruction *NC = new BitCastInst(GEPI->getOperand(0), GEPI->getType(), 6936 GEPI->getName(), GEPI); 6937 NC->setDebugLoc(GEPI->getDebugLoc()); 6938 GEPI->replaceAllUsesWith(NC); 6939 GEPI->eraseFromParent(); 6940 ++NumGEPsElim; 6941 optimizeInst(NC, ModifiedDT); 6942 return true; 6943 } 6944 if (tryUnmergingGEPsAcrossIndirectBr(GEPI, TTI)) { 6945 return true; 6946 } 6947 return false; 6948 } 6949 6950 if (tryToSinkFreeOperands(I)) 6951 return true; 6952 6953 if (CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I)) 6954 return optimizeCallInst(CI, ModifiedDT); 6955 6956 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) 6957 return optimizeSelectInst(SI); 6958 6959 if (ShuffleVectorInst *SVI = dyn_cast<ShuffleVectorInst>(I)) 6960 return optimizeShuffleVectorInst(SVI); 6961 6962 if (auto *Switch = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(I)) 6963 return optimizeSwitchInst(Switch); 6964 6965 if (isa<ExtractElementInst>(I)) 6966 return optimizeExtractElementInst(I); 6967 6968 return false; 6969 } 6970 6971 /// Given an OR instruction, check to see if this is a bitreverse 6972 /// idiom. If so, insert the new intrinsic and return true. 6973 static bool makeBitReverse(Instruction &I, const DataLayout &DL, 6974 const TargetLowering &TLI) { 6975 if (!I.getType()->isIntegerTy() || 6976 !TLI.isOperationLegalOrCustom(ISD::BITREVERSE, 6977 TLI.getValueType(DL, I.getType(), true))) 6978 return false; 6979 6980 SmallVector<Instruction*, 4> Insts; 6981 if (!recognizeBSwapOrBitReverseIdiom(&I, false, true, Insts)) 6982 return false; 6983 Instruction *LastInst = Insts.back(); 6984 I.replaceAllUsesWith(LastInst); 6985 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(&I); 6986 return true; 6987 } 6988 6989 // In this pass we look for GEP and cast instructions that are used 6990 // across basic blocks and rewrite them to improve basic-block-at-a-time 6991 // selection. 6992 bool CodeGenPrepare::optimizeBlock(BasicBlock &BB, bool &ModifiedDT) { 6993 SunkAddrs.clear(); 6994 bool MadeChange = false; 6995 6996 CurInstIterator = BB.begin(); 6997 while (CurInstIterator != BB.end()) { 6998 MadeChange |= optimizeInst(&*CurInstIterator++, ModifiedDT); 6999 if (ModifiedDT) 7000 return true; 7001 } 7002 7003 bool MadeBitReverse = true; 7004 while (TLI && MadeBitReverse) { 7005 MadeBitReverse = false; 7006 for (auto &I : reverse(BB)) { 7007 if (makeBitReverse(I, *DL, *TLI)) { 7008 MadeBitReverse = MadeChange = true; 7009 ModifiedDT = true; 7010 break; 7011 } 7012 } 7013 } 7014 MadeChange |= dupRetToEnableTailCallOpts(&BB); 7015 7016 return MadeChange; 7017 } 7018 7019 // llvm.dbg.value is far away from the value then iSel may not be able 7020 // handle it properly. iSel will drop llvm.dbg.value if it can not 7021 // find a node corresponding to the value. 7022 bool CodeGenPrepare::placeDbgValues(Function &F) { 7023 bool MadeChange = false; 7024 for (BasicBlock &BB : F) { 7025 Instruction *PrevNonDbgInst = nullptr; 7026 for (BasicBlock::iterator BI = BB.begin(), BE = BB.end(); BI != BE;) { 7027 Instruction *Insn = &*BI++; 7028 DbgValueInst *DVI = dyn_cast<DbgValueInst>(Insn); 7029 // Leave dbg.values that refer to an alloca alone. These 7030 // intrinsics describe the address of a variable (= the alloca) 7031 // being taken. They should not be moved next to the alloca 7032 // (and to the beginning of the scope), but rather stay close to 7033 // where said address is used. 7034 if (!DVI || (DVI->getValue() && isa<AllocaInst>(DVI->getValue()))) { 7035 PrevNonDbgInst = Insn; 7036 continue; 7037 } 7038 7039 Instruction *VI = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(DVI->getValue()); 7040 if (VI && VI != PrevNonDbgInst && !VI->isTerminator()) { 7041 // If VI is a phi in a block with an EHPad terminator, we can't insert 7042 // after it. 7043 if (isa<PHINode>(VI) && VI->getParent()->getTerminator()->isEHPad()) 7044 continue; 7045 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Moving Debug Value before :\n" 7046 << *DVI << ' ' << *VI); 7047 DVI->removeFromParent(); 7048 if (isa<PHINode>(VI)) 7049 DVI->insertBefore(&*VI->getParent()->getFirstInsertionPt()); 7050 else 7051 DVI->insertAfter(VI); 7052 MadeChange = true; 7053 ++NumDbgValueMoved; 7054 } 7055 } 7056 } 7057 return MadeChange; 7058 } 7059 7060 /// Scale down both weights to fit into uint32_t. 7061 static void scaleWeights(uint64_t &NewTrue, uint64_t &NewFalse) { 7062 uint64_t NewMax = (NewTrue > NewFalse) ? NewTrue : NewFalse; 7063 uint32_t Scale = (NewMax / std::numeric_limits<uint32_t>::max()) + 1; 7064 NewTrue = NewTrue / Scale; 7065 NewFalse = NewFalse / Scale; 7066 } 7067 7068 /// Some targets prefer to split a conditional branch like: 7069 /// \code 7070 /// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0 7071 /// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0 7072 /// %or.cond = or i1 %0, %1 7073 /// br i1 %or.cond, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB 7074 /// \endcode 7075 /// into multiple branch instructions like: 7076 /// \code 7077 /// bb1: 7078 /// %0 = icmp ne i32 %a, 0 7079 /// br i1 %0, label %TrueBB, label %bb2 7080 /// bb2: 7081 /// %1 = icmp ne i32 %b, 0 7082 /// br i1 %1, label %TrueBB, label %FalseBB 7083 /// \endcode 7084 /// This usually allows instruction selection to do even further optimizations 7085 /// and combine the compare with the branch instruction. Currently this is 7086 /// applied for targets which have "cheap" jump instructions. 7087 /// 7088 /// FIXME: Remove the (equivalent?) implementation in SelectionDAG. 7089 /// 7090 bool CodeGenPrepare::splitBranchCondition(Function &F) { 7091 if (!TM || !TM->Options.EnableFastISel || !TLI || TLI->isJumpExpensive()) 7092 return false; 7093 7094 bool MadeChange = false; 7095 for (auto &BB : F) { 7096 // Does this BB end with the following? 7097 // %cond1 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ... 7098 // %cond2 = icmp|fcmp|binary instruction ... 7099 // %cond.or = or|and i1 %cond1, cond2 7100 // br i1 %cond.or label %dest1, label %dest2" 7101 BinaryOperator *LogicOp; 7102 BasicBlock *TBB, *FBB; 7103 if (!match(BB.getTerminator(), m_Br(m_OneUse(m_BinOp(LogicOp)), TBB, FBB))) 7104 continue; 7105 7106 auto *Br1 = cast<BranchInst>(BB.getTerminator()); 7107 if (Br1->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_unpredictable)) 7108 continue; 7109 7110 unsigned Opc; 7111 Value *Cond1, *Cond2; 7112 if (match(LogicOp, m_And(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)), 7113 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2))))) 7114 Opc = Instruction::And; 7115 else if (match(LogicOp, m_Or(m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond1)), 7116 m_OneUse(m_Value(Cond2))))) 7117 Opc = Instruction::Or; 7118 else 7119 continue; 7120 7121 if (!match(Cond1, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) || 7122 !match(Cond2, m_CombineOr(m_Cmp(), m_BinOp())) ) 7123 continue; 7124 7125 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Before branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump()); 7126 7127 // Create a new BB. 7128 auto TmpBB = 7129 BasicBlock::Create(BB.getContext(), BB.getName() + ".cond.split", 7130 BB.getParent(), BB.getNextNode()); 7131 7132 // Update original basic block by using the first condition directly by the 7133 // branch instruction and removing the no longer needed and/or instruction. 7134 Br1->setCondition(Cond1); 7135 LogicOp->eraseFromParent(); 7136 7137 // Depending on the condition we have to either replace the true or the 7138 // false successor of the original branch instruction. 7139 if (Opc == Instruction::And) 7140 Br1->setSuccessor(0, TmpBB); 7141 else 7142 Br1->setSuccessor(1, TmpBB); 7143 7144 // Fill in the new basic block. 7145 auto *Br2 = IRBuilder<>(TmpBB).CreateCondBr(Cond2, TBB, FBB); 7146 if (auto *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Cond2)) { 7147 I->removeFromParent(); 7148 I->insertBefore(Br2); 7149 } 7150 7151 // Update PHI nodes in both successors. The original BB needs to be 7152 // replaced in one successor's PHI nodes, because the branch comes now from 7153 // the newly generated BB (NewBB). In the other successor we need to add one 7154 // incoming edge to the PHI nodes, because both branch instructions target 7155 // now the same successor. Depending on the original branch condition 7156 // (and/or) we have to swap the successors (TrueDest, FalseDest), so that 7157 // we perform the correct update for the PHI nodes. 7158 // This doesn't change the successor order of the just created branch 7159 // instruction (or any other instruction). 7160 if (Opc == Instruction::Or) 7161 std::swap(TBB, FBB); 7162 7163 // Replace the old BB with the new BB. 7164 for (PHINode &PN : TBB->phis()) { 7165 int i; 7166 while ((i = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(&BB)) >= 0) 7167 PN.setIncomingBlock(i, TmpBB); 7168 } 7169 7170 // Add another incoming edge form the new BB. 7171 for (PHINode &PN : FBB->phis()) { 7172 auto *Val = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(&BB); 7173 PN.addIncoming(Val, TmpBB); 7174 } 7175 7176 // Update the branch weights (from SelectionDAGBuilder:: 7177 // FindMergedConditions). 7178 if (Opc == Instruction::Or) { 7179 // Codegen X | Y as: 7180 // BB1: 7181 // jmp_if_X TBB 7182 // jmp TmpBB 7183 // TmpBB: 7184 // jmp_if_Y TBB 7185 // jmp FBB 7186 // 7187 7188 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for NewBB. 7189 // The requirement is that 7190 // TrueProb for BB1 + (FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB) 7191 // = TrueProb for original BB. 7192 // Assuming the original weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's 7193 // weights to A and A+2B, and set TmpBB's weights to A and 2B. This choice 7194 // assumes that 7195 // TrueProb for BB1 == FalseProb for BB1 * TrueProb for TmpBB. 7196 // Another choice is to assume TrueProb for BB1 equals to TrueProb for 7197 // TmpBB, but the math is more complicated. 7198 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight; 7199 if (Br1->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) { 7200 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight; 7201 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = TrueWeight + 2 * FalseWeight; 7202 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight); 7203 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext()) 7204 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); 7205 7206 NewTrueWeight = TrueWeight; 7207 NewFalseWeight = 2 * FalseWeight; 7208 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight); 7209 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext()) 7210 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); 7211 } 7212 } else { 7213 // Codegen X & Y as: 7214 // BB1: 7215 // jmp_if_X TmpBB 7216 // jmp FBB 7217 // TmpBB: 7218 // jmp_if_Y TBB 7219 // jmp FBB 7220 // 7221 // This requires creation of TmpBB after CurBB. 7222 7223 // We have flexibility in setting Prob for BB1 and Prob for TmpBB. 7224 // The requirement is that 7225 // FalseProb for BB1 + (TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB) 7226 // = FalseProb for original BB. 7227 // Assuming the original weights are A and B, one choice is to set BB1's 7228 // weights to 2A+B and B, and set TmpBB's weights to 2A and B. This choice 7229 // assumes that 7230 // FalseProb for BB1 == TrueProb for BB1 * FalseProb for TmpBB. 7231 uint64_t TrueWeight, FalseWeight; 7232 if (Br1->extractProfMetadata(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)) { 7233 uint64_t NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight + FalseWeight; 7234 uint64_t NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight; 7235 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight); 7236 Br1->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br1->getContext()) 7237 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); 7238 7239 NewTrueWeight = 2 * TrueWeight; 7240 NewFalseWeight = FalseWeight; 7241 scaleWeights(NewTrueWeight, NewFalseWeight); 7242 Br2->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, MDBuilder(Br2->getContext()) 7243 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); 7244 } 7245 } 7246 7247 // Note: No point in getting fancy here, since the DT info is never 7248 // available to CodeGenPrepare. 7249 ModifiedDT = true; 7250 7251 MadeChange = true; 7252 7253 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "After branch condition splitting\n"; BB.dump(); 7254 TmpBB->dump()); 7255 } 7256 return MadeChange; 7257 } 7258